cbklib

Check-in [abcd56f94c]
Login

Many hyperlinks are disabled.
Use anonymous login to enable hyperlinks.

Overview
Comment:Revisions and additions of OSS utilities
Timelines: family | ancestors | descendants | both | trunk
Files: files | file ages | folders
SHA1:abcd56f94c6fecc62832584a857c4de5c4b20e2a
User & Date: admin 2015-08-30 02:55:56
Context
2015-09-16
10:43
Tweak xplat for Windows support check-in: 9b9159ddfe user: admin tags: trunk
2015-08-30
02:55
Revisions and additions of OSS utilities check-in: abcd56f94c user: admin tags: trunk
2015-07-01
02:40
remove libraries check-in: 9c394057df user: admin tags: trunk
Changes
Hide Diffs Side-by-Side Diffs Ignore Whitespace Patch

Deleted appname/appname.tcl.

     1         -package provide appname 1.0 
     2         -
     3         -namespace eval appname {
     4         -
     5         -    proc setAppName {appname appversion} {
     6         -
     7         -    variable name
     8         -    variable version
     9         -
    10         -    set name $appname
    11         -    set version $appversion
    12         -
    13         -    return [list [namespace current]::$name [namespace current]::$version]
    14         -
    15         -}
    16         -
    17         -namespace export *
    18         -}
    19         -

Deleted appname/pkgIndex.tcl.

     1         -package ifneeded appname 1.0 [list source [file join $dir appname.tcl]]
     2         -
     3         -
     4         -
     5         -    

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ArrowButton.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ArrowButton</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ArrowButton</B>
     6         - - Button widget with an arrow shape.
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ArrowButton</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -<TR>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
    30         -</TR>
    31         -<TR>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    34         -</TR>
    35         -<TR>
    36         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TR>
    38         -</TR>
    39         -<TR>
    40         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
    42         -</TR>
    43         -</TABLE></DD>
    44         -</DL>
    45         -<DL>
    46         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    47         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TR>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowbd">-arrowbd</A></TR>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowrelief">-arrowrelief</A></TR>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-clean">-clean</A></TR>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dir">-dir</A></TR>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TR>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    63         -</TR>
    64         -<TR>
    65         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
    67         -</TR>
    68         -<TR>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipadx">-ipadx</A></TR>
    71         -</TR>
    72         -<TR>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipady">-ipady</A></TR>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
    75         -</TR>
    76         -<TR>
    77         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    79         -</TR>
    80         -</TABLE></DD>
    81         -</DL>
    82         -<DL>
    83         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    84         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    85         - <I>option</I>
    86         -</DD>
    87         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    88         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    89         -</DD>
    90         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
    91         -</DD>
    92         -</DL>
    93         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    94         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    95         -<P>
    96         -
    97         -ArrowButton can be of two types following <B>type</B> option:
    98         -for <B>button</B> type, it is standard button with an arrow drawn on it;
    99         -for <B>arrow</B> type, it is an arrow like scrollbar's arrow.
   100         -</P>
   101         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   102         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   103         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
   104         -<DD>
   105         -
   106         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is pressed
   107         -over the ArrowButton. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive
   108         -integer, this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the button and until
   109         -mouse button 1 is released.
   110         -</DD>
   111         -</DL>
   112         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowbd"><B>-arrowbd</B></A></DT>
   113         -<DD>
   114         -
   115         -When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the border width of the
   116         -arrow. Must be 1 or 2.
   117         -
   118         -</DD>
   119         -</DL>
   120         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowrelief"><B>-arrowrelief</B></A></DT>
   121         -<DD>
   122         -
   123         -When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the relief of the arrow.
   124         -Must be <B>raised</B> or <B>sunken</B>.
   125         -
   126         -</DD>
   127         -</DL>
   128         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-clean"><B>-clean</B></A></DT>
   129         -<DD>
   130         -
   131         -Specifies a level of quality, between 0 and 2, for the arrow.
   132         -If 0, the arrow is drawn with its maximum width and height.
   133         -If 1, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd to have same edges.
   134         -If 2, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd and the orthogonal to be (base+1)/2 to
   135         -have 'straight' diagonal for edges.
   136         -</DD>
   137         -</DL>
   138         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
   139         -<DD>
   140         -
   141         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton.  This command
   142         -is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the ArrowButton
   143         -window.
   144         -</DD>
   145         -</DL>
   146         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dir"><B>-dir</B></A></DT>
   147         -<DD>
   148         -
   149         -Specifies the direction of the arrow: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B>
   150         -or <B>right</B>.
   151         -</DD>
   152         -</DL>
   153         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
   154         -<DD>
   155         -
   156         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is released.
   157         -This command is called even if pointer is not over the ArrowButton, and always before
   158         -the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
   159         -It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
   160         -<B>repeatinterval</B>.
   161         -</DD>
   162         -</DL>
   163         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   164         -<DD>
   165         -
   166         -Specifies a desired height for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
   167         -</DD>
   168         -</DL>
   169         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
   170         -<DD>
   171         -
   172         -Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
   173         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   174         -</DD>
   175         -</DL>
   176         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
   177         -<DD>
   178         -Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
   179         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   180         -</DD>
   181         -</DL>
   182         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
   183         -<DD>
   184         -Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
   185         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   186         -</DD>
   187         -</DL>
   188         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipadx"><B>-ipadx</B></A></DT>
   189         -<DD>
   190         -
   191         -Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the right and left side
   192         -of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
   193         -</DD>
   194         -</DL>
   195         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipady"><B>-ipady</B></A></DT>
   196         -<DD>
   197         -
   198         -Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the top and bottom side
   199         -of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
   200         -</DD>
   201         -</DL>
   202         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   203         -<DD>
   204         -
   205         -Specifies one of three states for the ArrowButton: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
   206         -or <B>disabled</B>.
   207         -<DL><DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>button</I>:</DT>
   208         -<DD>In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the
   209         -<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is
   210         -typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
   211         -the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
   212         -<B>activebackground</B> options. In disabled state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
   213         -<B>background</B> options determine how the ArrowButton is displayed.
   214         -</DD>
   215         -<DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>:</DT>
   216         -<DD>Only colors of arrow change. The background of ArrowButton is always
   217         -displayed using <B>troughcolor</B> option.
   218         -In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>background</B> option. The active
   219         -state is typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
   220         -the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activebackground</B> option. In disabled state
   221         -the ArrowButton is displayed with a dark stipple.
   222         -</DD>
   223         -</DL>
   224         -Disabled state means that the ArrowButton
   225         -should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate
   226         -the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
   227         -</DD>
   228         -</DL>
   229         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
   230         -<DD>
   231         -
   232         -Determines the type of the ArrowButton: <B>button</B> for standard button look, or
   233         -<B>arrow</B> scrollbar's arrow look.
   234         -</DD>
   235         -</DL>
   236         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   237         -<DD>
   238         -
   239         -Specifies a desired width for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
   240         -</DD>
   241         -</DL>
   242         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   243         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   244         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   245         - <I>option</I>
   246         -</DT><DD>
   247         -
   248         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   249         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   250         -</DD></DL>
   251         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   252         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   253         -</DT><DD>
   254         -
   255         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   256         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   257         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   258         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   259         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   260         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   261         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   262         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   263         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   264         -
   265         -</DD></DL>
   266         -<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
   267         -</DT><DD>
   268         -
   269         -If ArrowButton <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the button.
   270         -ArrowButton is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
   271         -<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then ArrowButton is redisplayed with
   272         -normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
   273         -are called.
   274         -<P><B>invoke</B> is called when ArrowButton has input focus and user press the space bar.
   275         -</DD></DL>
   276         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/BWidget.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
     5         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     6         -<DD><B>BWidget</B>
     7         - - Description text
     8         -</DD></DL>
     9         -<DL>
    10         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    11         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#XLFDfont"><B>XLFDfont</B></A>
    12         - <I>cmd</I>
    13         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    14         -</DD>
    15         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#assert"><B>assert</B></A>
    16         - <I>exp</I>
    17         - ?<I>msg</I>?
    18         -</DD>
    19         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#badOptionString"><B>badOptionString</B></A>
    20         - <I>type</I>
    21         - <I>value</I>
    22         - <I>list</I>
    23         -</DD>
    24         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#bindMouseWheel"><B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
    25         - <I>widget</I>
    26         -</DD>
    27         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#classes"><B>classes</B></A>
    28         - <I>class</I>
    29         -</DD>
    30         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#clonename"><B>clonename</B></A>
    31         - <I>menu</I>
    32         -</DD>
    33         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#focus"><B>focus</B></A>
    34         - <I>option</I>
    35         - <I>path</I>
    36         -</DD>
    37         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#get3dcolor"><B>get3dcolor</B></A>
    38         - <I>path</I>
    39         - <I>bgcolor</I>
    40         -</DD>
    41         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#getname"><B>getname</B></A>
    42         - <I>name</I>
    43         -</DD>
    44         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#grab"><B>grab</B></A>
    45         - <I>option</I>
    46         - <I>path</I>
    47         -</DD>
    48         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#inuse"><B>inuse</B></A>
    49         - <I>class</I>
    50         -</DD>
    51         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#library"><B>library</B></A>
    52         - <I>class</I> ?<i>class ...</i>?
    53         -</DD>
    54         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#lreorder"><B>lreorder</B></A>
    55         - <I>list</I>
    56         - <I>neworder</I>
    57         -</DD>
    58         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#parsetext"><B>parsetext</B></A>
    59         - <I>text</I>
    60         -</DD>
    61         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#place"><B>place</B></A>
    62         - <I>path</I>
    63         - <I>w</I>
    64         - <I>h</I>
    65         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    66         -</DD>
    67         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#write"><B>write</B></A>
    68         - <I>filename</I> ?<i>mode</i>?
    69         -</DD>
    70         -<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#wrongNumArgsString"><B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
    71         - <I>string</I>
    72         -</DD>
    73         -</DL>
    74         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    75         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    76         -<P>
    77         -Description text
    78         -</P>
    79         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    80         -<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    81         -<DL><DT><A NAME="XLFDfont">BWidget::<B>XLFDfont</B></A>
    82         - <I>cmd</I>
    83         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    84         -</DT><DD>
    85         -Description text
    86         -</DD></DL>
    87         -<DL><DT><A NAME="assert">BWidget::<B>assert</B></A>
    88         - <I>exp</I>
    89         - ?<I>msg</I>?
    90         -</DT><DD>
    91         -Description text
    92         -</DD></DL>
    93         -<DL><DT><A NAME="badOptionString">BWidget::<B>badOptionString</B></A>
    94         - <I>type</I>
    95         - <I>value</I>
    96         - <I>list</I>
    97         -</DT><DD>
    98         -Return a proper error string for a <i>value</i> of <i>type</i> that doesn't
    99         -match <i>list</i>.
   100         -</DD></DL>
   101         -
   102         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindMouseWheel">BWidget::<B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
   103         - <I>widget</I>
   104         -</DT><DD>
   105         -    Bind the given <i>widget</i> with the standard mouse wheel bindings.
   106         -</DD></DL>
   107         -
   108         -<DL><DT><A NAME="classes">BWidget::<B>classes</B></A>
   109         - <I>class</I>
   110         -</DT><DD>
   111         -    Returns a list of classes needed by the given <i>class</i>.
   112         -</DD></DL>
   113         -
   114         -<DL><DT><A NAME="clonename">BWidget::<B>clonename</B></A>
   115         - <I>menu</I>
   116         -</DT><DD>
   117         -Description text
   118         -</DD></DL>
   119         -<DL><DT><A NAME="focus">BWidget::<B>focus</B></A>
   120         - <I>option</I>
   121         - <I>path</I>
   122         -</DT><DD>
   123         -Description text
   124         -</DD></DL>
   125         -<DL><DT><A NAME="get3dcolor">BWidget::<B>get3dcolor</B></A>
   126         - <I>path</I>
   127         - <I>bgcolor</I>
   128         -</DT><DD>
   129         -Description text
   130         -</DD></DL>
   131         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getname">BWidget::<B>getname</B></A>
   132         - <I>name</I>
   133         -</DT><DD>
   134         -Description text
   135         -</DD></DL>
   136         -<DL><DT><A NAME="grab">BWidget::<B>grab</B></A>
   137         - <I>option</I>
   138         - <I>path</I>
   139         -</DT><DD>
   140         -Description text
   141         -</DD></DL>
   142         -
   143         -<DL><DT><A NAME="inuse">BWidget::<B>inuse</B></A>
   144         - <I>class</I>
   145         -</DT><DD>
   146         -    Returns true or false if the given <i>class</i> is being used by the
   147         -    current running program.
   148         -</DD></DL>
   149         -
   150         -<DL><DT><A NAME="library">BWidget::<B>library</B></A>
   151         - <I>class</I>
   152         - ?<i>class ...</i>?
   153         -</DT><DD>
   154         -    Returns a string of code that contains all the libraries needed to
   155         -    use the widgets given by <i>class</i>.  Each class's code and the
   156         -    code of its dependent classes is appended to the string and returned.
   157         -    This is mostly useful for saving BWidgets to another project.
   158         -</DD></DL>
   159         -
   160         -<DL><DT><A NAME="lreorder">BWidget::<B>lreorder</B></A>
   161         - <I>list</I>
   162         - <I>neworder</I>
   163         -</DT><DD>
   164         -Description text
   165         -</DD></DL>
   166         -<DL><DT><A NAME="parsetext">BWidget::<B>parsetext</B></A>
   167         - <I>text</I>
   168         -</DT><DD>
   169         -Description text
   170         -</DD></DL>
   171         -<DL><DT><A NAME="place">BWidget::<B>place</B></A>
   172         - <I>path</I>
   173         - <I>w</I>
   174         - <I>h</I>
   175         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   176         -</DT><DD>
   177         -Used to position and resize the widget specified by
   178         -<I>path</I>. <I>w</I> and <I>h</I> are used to specify the requested
   179         -width and height of the <I>path</I> widget for use by <B>wm
   180         -geometry</B> (set to 0 to use current values). The placement of the widget relative to other widgets or
   181         -the screen is controlled by additional arguments:
   182         -<DL>
   183         - <DT><B>at</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I></DT>
   184         - <DD>Place the widget specified by the <I>path</I> argument at screen
   185         - position x,y. See <B>wm geometry</B> for information about window
   186         - placement values.</DD>
   187         -
   188         - <DT><B>center</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
   189         - <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget centered against <I>widget</I> or against the
   190         - root widget if <I>widget</I> is not given.</DD>
   191         -
   192         - <DT><B>left</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
   193         - <DT><B>right</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
   194         - <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget either left or right of the
   195         - reference widget (or the root widget if <I>widget</I> is not
   196         - specified). If the reference widget's position is such that the newly
   197         - placed window might be obscured then the opposite side will be tried.</DD>
   198         -
   199         - <DT><B>above</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
   200         - <DT><B>below</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
   201         - <DD>As for left/right above, this option causes the widget to be
   202         - placed either above or below the reference widget with the opposite
   203         - placement being attempted if the newly placed widget will not be visible.
   204         -</DL>
   205         -</DL>
   206         -
   207         -<DL><DT><A NAME="write">BWidget::<B>write</B></A>
   208         - <I>filename</I>
   209         - ?<i>mode</i>?
   210         -</DT><DD>
   211         -    Writes the currently used set of BWidget class code to the given
   212         -    <i>filename</i>.  All the code necessary to run the BWidgets
   213         -    currently in use is written to the file.  This is mostly useful
   214         -    for saving BWidget code to another project as a single file instead
   215         -    of the entire BWidget package.
   216         -</DD></DL>
   217         -
   218         -<DL>
   219         -<DT><A NAME="wrongNumArgsString">BWidget::<B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
   220         - <I>string</I>
   221         -</DT>
   222         -<DD>
   223         -    Returns a standard error string for the wrong number of arguments.
   224         -    <i>string</i> is appended to the standard string.
   225         -</DD>
   226         -</DL>
   227         -
   228         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Button.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Button</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Button</B>
     6         - - Button widget with enhanced options
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Button</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
    15         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    16         -<TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TD>
    18         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TD>
    19         -</TR>
    20         -<TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
    22         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    23         -</TD>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TD>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    35         -</TD>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TD>
    62         -</TABLE></DD>
    63         -<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
    64         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    65         -<TR>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-compound">-compound</A></TD>
    67         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
    68         -</TR>
    69         -<TR>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
    71         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-style">-style</A></TD>
    72         -</TR>
    73         -<TR>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
    75         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
    76         -</TR>
    77         -<TR>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    79         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
    80         -</TR>
    81         -<TR>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
    83         -</TABLE></DD>
    84         -</DL>
    85         -<DL>
    86         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    87         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    88         -<TR>
    89         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TD>
    90         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
    91         -</TR>
    92         -<TR>
    93         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TD>
    94         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TD>
    95         -</TR>
    96         -<TR>
    97         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
    98         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
    99         -</TR>
   100         -<TR>
   101         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
   102         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
   103         -</TR>
   104         -<TR>
   105         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TD>
   106         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TD>
   107         -</TR>
   108         -<TR>
   109         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
   110         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TD>
   111         -</TR>
   112         -<TR>
   113         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
   114         -</TABLE></DD>
   115         -</DL>
   116         -<DL>
   117         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   118         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   119         - <I>option</I>
   120         -</DD>
   121         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   122         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   123         -</DD>
   124         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
   125         -</DD>
   126         -</DL>
   127         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   128         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   129         -<P>
   130         -
   131         -Button widget extends the Tk button with new options.
   132         -<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
   133         -a new relief style, callback for <B>arm</B>/<B>disarm</B>, and
   134         -<B>repeatdelay</B>/<B>repeatinterval</B> options has been added.
   135         -</P>
   136         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   137         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   138         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
   139         -<DD>
   140         -
   141         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is pressed over the
   142         -Button. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive integer,
   143         -this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the Button and until mouse
   144         -button 1 is released.
   145         -</DD>
   146         -</DL>
   147         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
   148         -<DD>
   149         -
   150         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button.  This command
   151         -is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the Button
   152         -window.
   153         -</DD>
   154         -</DL>
   155         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
   156         -<DD>
   157         -
   158         -Specifies one of three states for the default ring: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
   159         -or <B>disabled</B>. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific
   160         -appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform
   161         -specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default
   162         -button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size.
   163         -In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without
   164         -leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result
   165         -in a smaller button than the active state.
   166         -</DD>
   167         -</DL>
   168         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
   169         -<DD>
   170         -
   171         -Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is released.
   172         -This command is called even if pointer is not over the Button, and always before
   173         -the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
   174         -It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
   175         -<B>repeatinterval</B>.
   176         -</DD>
   177         -</DL>
   178         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   179         -<DD>
   180         -
   181         -Specifies a desired height for the Button.
   182         -If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
   183         -screen units;
   184         -for text it is in lines of text.
   185         -If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired height is computed
   186         -from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
   187         -Option not available when widget is <I>themed</I>.
   188         -</DD>
   189         -</DL>
   190         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
   191         -<DD>
   192         -
   193         -Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
   194         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   195         -</DD>
   196         -</DL>
   197         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
   198         -<DD>
   199         -Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
   200         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   201         -</DD>
   202         -</DL>
   203         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
   204         -<DD>
   205         -Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
   206         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   207         -</DD>
   208         -</DL>
   209         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
   210         -<DD>
   211         -
   212         -Specifies a standard name for the button. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
   213         -found in the resources database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
   214         -are extracted from its value.
   215         -
   216         -</DD>
   217         -</DL>
   218         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
   219         -<DD>
   220         -
   221         -Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are standard values for
   222         -button relief (<B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>, <B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>) and <B>link</B>, which specifies that button relief is <B>flat</B> when pointer
   223         -is outside the button and <B>raised</B> when pointer is inside.<BR>
   224         -This option has only the following effect if the widget is <I>themed</I>:
   225         -The value <B>link</B> used a style <B>Toolbutton</B> while any other value uses the standard effect.
   226         -</DD>
   227         -</DL>
   228         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   229         -<DD>
   230         -
   231         -Specifies one of three states for the Button:  <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
   232         -or <B>disabled</B>.  In normal state the Button is displayed using the
   233         -<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options.  The active state is
   234         -typically used when the pointer is over the Button.  In active state
   235         -the Button is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
   236         -<B>activebackground</B> options.  Disabled state means that the Button
   237         -should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
   238         -the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
   239         -In this state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
   240         -<B>background</B> options determine how the Button is displayed.
   241         -</DD>
   242         -</DL>
   243         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
   244         -<DD>
   245         -
   246         -Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label of the button.
   247         -0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
   248         -and so on.
   249         -<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
   250         -of the Button to call Button::<B>setfocus</B>.
   251         -
   252         -</DD>
   253         -</DL>
   254         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   255         -<DD>
   256         -
   257         -If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
   258         -screen units;
   259         -for text it is in characters.
   260         -If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired width is computed
   261         -from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
   262         -</DD>
   263         -</DL>
   264         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   265         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   266         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   267         - <I>option</I>
   268         -</DT><DD>
   269         -
   270         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   271         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   272         -</DD></DL>
   273         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   274         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   275         -</DT><DD>
   276         -
   277         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   278         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   279         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   280         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   281         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   282         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   283         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   284         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   285         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   286         -
   287         -</DD></DL>
   288         -<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
   289         -</DT><DD>
   290         -
   291         -If Button <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the Button.
   292         -Button is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
   293         -<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then Button is redisplayed with
   294         -normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
   295         -are called.
   296         -<P><B>invoke</B> is called when Button has input focus and user press the space bar.
   297         -
   298         -</DD></DL>
   299         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   300         -<B><A NAME="wc">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
   301         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Invoke"><I>&lt;&lt;Invoke&gt;&gt;</I></A>
   302         -</DT><DD>
   303         -
   304         -Invoke the <B>invoke</B> widget command.
   305         -</DD></DL>
   306         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   307         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ButtonBox.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ButtonBox</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ButtonBox</B>
     6         - - Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ButtonBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-orient">-orient</A></TR>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pady">-pady</A></TR>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -<TR>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-spacing">-spacing</A></TD>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
    30         -</TABLE></DD>
    31         -</DL>
    32         -<DL>
    33         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    34         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
    35         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    36         -</DD>
    37         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    38         - <I>option</I>
    39         -</DD>
    40         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    41         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    42         -</DD>
    43         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
    44         - <I>index</I>
    45         -</DD>
    46         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
    47         - <I>index</I>
    48         -</DD>
    49         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
    50         -  <i>index</i> ?<I>option value...</I>?
    51         -</DD>
    52         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
    53         - <I>index</I>
    54         -</DD>
    55         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
    56         - <I>index</I>
    57         - <I>option</I>
    58         -</DD>
    59         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
    60         - <I>index</I>
    61         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    62         -</DD>
    63         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
    64         - <I>index</I>
    65         -</DD>
    66         -</DL>
    67         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    68         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    69         -<P>
    70         -
    71         -ButtonBox layouts Button horizontally or vertically.
    72         -Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
    73         -Button it work. This index may be specified in any of the following forms:
    74         -<P>
    75         -<DL COMPACT>
    76         -<DT>
    77         -<I>number</I>
    78         -<DD>
    79         -Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
    80         -to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
    81         -<DT>
    82         -<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
    83         -<DD>
    84         -Indicates the last item added.
    85         -<DT><B>default</B>
    86         -<DD>
    87         -Indicates the default Button.
    88         -
    89         -<DT>
    90         -<i>name</i>
    91         -<DD>
    92         -Indicates the button whose <b>-name</b> option is <i>name</i>.
    93         -
    94         -<DT>
    95         -<i>text</i>
    96         -<DD>
    97         -Indicates the button whose <b>-text</b> option is <i>text</i>.
    98         -</DL>
    99         -
   100         -</P>
   101         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   102         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   103         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
   104         -<DD>
   105         -
   106         -Specifies a default background color for all added buttons and for the frame.<BR>
   107         -For <I>themed</I> wigets, the button color is not set.
   108         -
   109         -</DD>
   110         -</DL>
   111         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
   112         -<DD>
   113         -
   114         -Specifies the default button of the button box. The value is an integer
   115         -referencing the n-th added button, starting from 0.
   116         -If this value is -1 (the default), all button wil be drawn with their -default
   117         -option set to disabled, and this value can not be changed. <BR>If this value is 
   118         -not -1, the associated button is drawn with -default option set to active and
   119         -the others are drawn with -default option set to normal. The value can be changed
   120         -by configure.
   121         -
   122         -</DD>
   123         -</DL>
   124         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   125         -<DD>
   126         -
   127         -Specifies wether or not buttons must have the same width for horizontal layout.
   128         -
   129         -</DD>
   130         -</DL>
   131         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-orient"><B>-orient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   132         -<DD>
   133         -
   134         -Specifies the orientation of the button box. If this option is <B>horizontal</B>
   135         -(the default), buttons are added from top to bottom. 
   136         -If this option is <B>vertical</B>, buttons are added from left to right.
   137         -
   138         -</DD>
   139         -</DL>
   140         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
   141         -<DD>
   142         -
   143         -Specifies a default value for the -padx option of all added buttons.<BR>
   144         -Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
   145         -</DD>
   146         -</DL>
   147         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-pady"><B>-pady</B></A></DT>
   148         -<DD>
   149         -
   150         -Specifies a default value for the -pady option of all added buttons.<BR>
   151         -Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
   152         -
   153         -</DD>
   154         -</DL>
   155         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-spacing"><B>-spacing</B></A></DT>
   156         -<DD>
   157         -
   158         -Specifies the default spacing between buttons. This value can be changed before each
   159         -call to <B>add</B>.
   160         -
   161         -</DD>
   162         -</DL>
   163         -
   164         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   165         -<DD>
   166         -
   167         -Specifies a state for all the buttons in the button box.  Can be any state supported by buttons.
   168         -
   169         -</DD>
   170         -</DL>
   171         -
   172         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   173         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   174         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
   175         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   176         -</DT><DD>
   177         -
   178         -Add a button to the button box.
   179         -<P>
   180         -See <A HREF="Button.html"><B>Button</B></A> for description of options.
   181         -</DD></DL>
   182         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   183         - <I>option</I>
   184         -</DT><DD>
   185         -
   186         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   187         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   188         -</DD></DL>
   189         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   190         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   191         -</DT><DD>
   192         -
   193         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   194         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   195         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   196         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   197         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   198         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   199         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   200         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   201         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   202         -
   203         -</DD></DL>
   204         -
   205         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   206         - <I>index</I>
   207         -</DT><DD>
   208         -
   209         -Delete the button at <i>index</i> from the button box.
   210         -
   211         -</DD></DL>
   212         -
   213         -<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
   214         - <I>index</I>
   215         -</DT><DD>
   216         -
   217         -Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
   218         -
   219         -</DD></DL>
   220         -
   221         -<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
   222         - <I>index</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?
   223         -</DT><DD>
   224         -
   225         -Insert a new button into the button box before the given index.
   226         -
   227         -</DD></DL>
   228         -
   229         -<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
   230         - <I>index</I>
   231         -</DT><DD>
   232         -
   233         -Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
   234         -
   235         -</DD></DL>
   236         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
   237         - <I>index</I>
   238         - <I>option</I>
   239         -</DT><DD>
   240         -
   241         -Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
   242         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
   243         -
   244         -</DD></DL>
   245         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   246         - <I>index</I>
   247         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   248         -</DT><DD>
   249         -
   250         -This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
   251         -options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
   252         -the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
   253         -item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
   254         -in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
   255         -returns a list describing the current options for the item.
   256         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   257         -
   258         -</DD></DL>
   259         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
   260         - <I>index</I>
   261         -</DT><DD>
   262         -
   263         -Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
   264         -
   265         -</DD></DL>
   266         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ComboBox.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ComboBox</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ComboBox</B>
     6         - - ComboBox widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ComboBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -</TABLE></DD>
    24         -</DL>
    25         -<DL>
    26         -<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
    27         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
    63         -</TR>
    64         -<TR>
    65         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
    67         -</TR>
    68         -<TR>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
    71         -</TR>
    72         -<TR>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
    75         -</TR>
    76         -<TR>
    77         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
    79         -</TR>
    80         -<TR>
    81         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
    83         -</TR>
    84         -<TR>
    85         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
    86         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
    87         -</TR>
    88         -<TR>
    89         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
    90         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
    91         -</TR>
    92         -<TR>
    93         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    94         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
    95         -</TR>
    96         -<TR>
    97         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
    98         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
    99         -</TR>
   100         -<TR>
   101         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
   102         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
   103         -</TR>
   104         -</TABLE></DD>
   105         -</DL>
   106         -<DL>
   107         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
   108         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
   109         -<TR>
   110         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autocomplete">-autocomplete</A></TD>
   111         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autopost">-autopost</A></TD>
   112         -</TR>
   113         -<TR>
   114         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bwlistbox">-bwlistbox</A></TD>
   115         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-expand">-expand</A></TD>
   116         -</TR>
   117         -<TR>
   118         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
   119         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-hottrack">-hottrack</A></TD>
   120         -</TR>
   121         -<TR>
   122         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-images">-images</A></TD>
   123         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-listboxwidth">-listboxwidth</A></TD>
   124         -</TR>
   125         -<TR>
   126         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TD>
   127         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-postcommand">-postcommand</A></TD>
   128         -</TR>
   129         -<TR>
   130         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TD>
   131         -</TR>
   132         -</TABLE></DD>
   133         -</DL>
   134         -<DL>
   135         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   136         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
   137         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   138         -</DD>
   139         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   140         - <I>option</I>
   141         -</DD>
   142         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#clearvalue"><B>clearvalue</B></A>
   143         -</DD>
   144         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   145         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   146         -</DD>
   147         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#get"><B>get</B></A></DD>
   148         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getentry"><B>getentry</B></A></DD>
   149         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getlistbox"><B>getlistbox</B></A></DD>
   150         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A></DD>
   151         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#icursor"><B>icursor</B></A>
   152         -<I>index</I>
   153         -</DD>
   154         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#post"><B>post</B></A></DD>
   155         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
   156         - <I>index</I>
   157         -</DD>
   158         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#unpost"><B>unpost</B></A></DD>
   159         -</DL>
   160         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   161         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   162         -<P>
   163         -
   164         -ComboBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by
   165         -the <B>values</B> option.  The list of possible values can be popped by
   166         -pressing the ArrowButton or by clicking in the entry when <B>editable</B>
   167         -value of the ComboBox is <B>false</B>.<BR> If <B>editable</B> value of the
   168         -ComboBox is <B>true</B> and the entry has the focus, the user can press the
   169         -top and bottom arrow keys to modify its value. If the current value exactly
   170         -match a value in the list, then the previous (for top arrow key) or then
   171         -next (for bottom arrow key) value in the list is displayed.  If the current
   172         -value match the beginning of a value in the list, then this value is
   173         -displayed.  If the current value doesnt match anything, then the first
   174         -value is displayed.
   175         -
   176         -</P>
   177         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   178         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   179         -<DL>
   180         -    <DT><A NAME="-autocomplete"><B>-autocomplete</B></A></DT>
   181         -    <DD>
   182         -    Specifies whether or not the combobox should attempt to auto-complete
   183         -    the value in the entry field as the user types.  If true, the combobox
   184         -    will fill in a value that it finds in its value list as the user types
   185         -    into the entry.
   186         -    </DD>
   187         -</DL>
   188         -
   189         -<DL>
   190         -    <DT><A NAME="-autopost"><B>-autopost</B></A></DT>
   191         -    <DD>
   192         -    Specifies whether or not the combobox should post the drop down as
   193         -    the user types.  If true, the combobox will post and scroll to the
   194         -    entry that most closely matches the user entry.
   195         -    </DD>
   196         -</DL>
   197         -
   198         -<DL>
   199         -    <DT><A NAME="-bwlistbox"><B>-bwlistbox</B></A></DT>
   200         -    <DD>
   201         -    Specifies that the combobox should use a BWidget listbox in its drop
   202         -    down instead of the standard Tk option.  This option is enabled by
   203         -    default if the <b>-images</b> option is not empty.
   204         -    </DD>
   205         -</DL>
   206         -
   207         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-expand"><B>-expand</B></A></DT>
   208         -<DD>
   209         -
   210         -Specifies the value expansion behavior for the window. It must be
   211         -<B>none</B> (default) or <B>tab</B>. If <B>tab</B> is specified, then
   212         -a Tab binding is added to attempt to expand the current value based on
   213         -the other values in <B>-values</B>.
   214         -</DD>
   215         -</DL>
   216         -
   217         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   218         -<DD>
   219         -
   220         -Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less,
   221         -then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold
   222         -all the elements in the listbox.
   223         -</DD>
   224         -
   225         -<DL>
   226         -    <DT><A NAME="-hottrack"><B>-hottrack</B></A></DT>
   227         -    <DD>
   228         -    The selection in the drop down listbox will follow the mouse cursor
   229         -    as it moves.
   230         -    </DD>
   231         -</DL>
   232         -
   233         -<DL>
   234         -    <DT><A NAME="-images"><B>-images</B></A></DT>
   235         -    <DD>
   236         -    A list of images that correspond to the <b>-values</b> option.  Each
   237         -    image will be drawn next to its value in the drop down.  This option
   238         -    enables the <b>-bwlistbox</b> by default as it is needed to display
   239         -    images.
   240         -    </DD>
   241         -</DL>
   242         -
   243         -<DL>
   244         -    <DT><A NAME="-listboxwidth"><B>-listboxwidth</B></A></DT>
   245         -    <DD>
   246         -    Specifies the width of the listbox in the drop down.  Defaults to the
   247         -    same size as the combobox.
   248         -    </DD>
   249         -</DL>
   250         -
   251         -</DL>
   252         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
   253         -<DD>
   254         -
   255         -Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the ComboBox by selecting it in the listbox or pressing arrow key.
   256         -</DD>
   257         -</DL>
   258         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-postcommand"><B>-postcommand</B></A></DT>
   259         -<DD>
   260         -
   261         -Specifies a Tcl command called before the listbox of the ComboBox is mapped.
   262         -</DD>
   263         -</DL>
   264         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
   265         -<DD>
   266         -
   267         -Specifies the values to display in the listbox of the ComboBox.
   268         -</DD>
   269         -</DL>
   270         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   271         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   272         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
   273         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   274         -</DT><DD>
   275         -
   276         -Set bindings on the entry widget.
   277         -
   278         -</DD></DL>
   279         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   280         - <I>option</I>
   281         -</DT><DD>
   282         -
   283         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   284         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   285         -
   286         -</DD></DL>
   287         -
   288         -<DL><DT><A NAME="clearvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>clearvalue</B></A>
   289         -</DT><DD>
   290         -
   291         -Clears the current text of the ComboBox.
   292         -
   293         -</DD></DL>
   294         -
   295         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   296         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   297         -</DT><DD>
   298         -
   299         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
   300         -<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
   301         -options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
   302         -<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
   303         -<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
   304         -the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
   305         -<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
   306         -given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
   307         -returns an empty string.  <I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted
   308         -by the creation command.  Read-only options are not be modified.
   309         -
   310         -</DD></DL>
   311         -
   312         -<DL><DT><A NAME="get"><I>pathName</I> <B>get</B></A>
   313         -</DT><DD>
   314         -
   315         -Returns the current contents of the entry.
   316         -
   317         -</DD></DL>
   318         -
   319         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getentry"><I>pathName</I> <B>getentry</B></A>
   320         -</DT><DD>
   321         -
   322         -Returns the path to the contained entry widget.
   323         -
   324         -</DD></DL>
   325         -
   326         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getlistbox"><I>pathName</I> <B>getlistbox</B></A>
   327         -</DT><DD>
   328         -
   329         -Returns the path to the listbox in the drop down.
   330         -
   331         -</DD></DL>
   332         -
   333         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
   334         -</DT><DD>
   335         -
   336         -Returns the index of the current text of the ComboBox in the list of values,
   337         -or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
   338         -
   339         -</DD></DL>
   340         -
   341         -<DL><DT><A NAME="icursor"><I>pathName</I> <B>icursor</B></A>
   342         - <I>index</I>
   343         -</DT><DD>
   344         -
   345         -Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the
   346         -character given by <i>index</i>.  Returns an empty string.
   347         -
   348         -</DD></DL>
   349         -
   350         -<DL><DT><A NAME="post"><I>pathName</I> <B>post</B></A>
   351         -</DT><DD>
   352         -
   353         -Post the drop down.
   354         -
   355         -</DD></DL>
   356         -
   357         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
   358         - <I>index</I>
   359         -</DT><DD>
   360         -
   361         -Set the text of the ComboBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
   362         -<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
   363         -<P>
   364         -<DL COMPACT>
   365         -<DT>
   366         -<B>last</B>
   367         -<DD>
   368         -Specifies the last element of the list of values.
   369         -<DT><B>first</B>
   370         -<DD>
   371         -Specifies the first element of the list of values.
   372         -<DT>
   373         -<B>next</B>
   374         -<DD>
   375         -Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
   376         -of values.
   377         -<DT><B>previous</B>
   378         -<DD>
   379         -Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
   380         -of values.
   381         -<DT>
   382         -@<I>number</I>
   383         -<DD>
   384         -Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
   385         -</DL>
   386         -
   387         -</DD></DL>
   388         -
   389         -<DL><DT><A NAME="unpost"><I>pathName</I> <B>unpost</B></A>
   390         -</DT><DD>
   391         -
   392         -Unpost the drop down.
   393         -
   394         -</DD></DL>
   395         -
   396         -<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
   397         -
   398         -When Entry of the ComboBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
   399         -to the default Entry bindings:
   400         -<UL>
   401         -<LI>Page up set the value of the ComboBox to the first value.
   402         -<LI>Page down set the value of the ComboBox to the last value.
   403         -<LI>Arrow up set the value of the ComboBox to the previous value.
   404         -<LI>Arrow down set the value of the ComboBox to the next value.
   405         -<LI>If <B>-autopost</B> is enabled, Escape unposts the listbox.
   406         -</UL>
   407         -If the listbox is not mapped and ComboBox is not editable or disabled,
   408         -mouse button 1 on the Entry cause the listbox to popup, as if the user press the ArrowButton.
   409         -
   410         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Dialog.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Dialog</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Dialog</B>
     6         - - Dialog abstraction with custom buttons
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Dialog</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">OPTIONS from <B>ButtonBox</B></A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
    25         -</TABLE></DD>
    26         -</DL>
    27         -<DL>
    28         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    29         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    30         -<TR>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
    33         -</TR>
    34         -<TR>
    35         -
    36         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-cancel">-cancel</A></TD>
    37         -</TR>
    38         -<TR>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
    40         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-geometry">-geometry</A></TR>
    41         -</TR>
    42         -<TR>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-image">-image</A></TR>
    44         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modal">-modal</A></TR>
    45         -</TR>
    46         -<TR>
    47         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
    48         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-place">-place</A></TR>
    49         -</TR>
    50         -<TR>
    51         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TR>
    52         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
    53         -</TR>
    54         -<TR>
    55         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
    56         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-transient">-transient</A></TR>
    57         -</TR>
    58         -</TABLE></DD>
    59         -</DL>
    60         -<DL>
    61         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    62         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
    63         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    64         -</DD>
    65         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    66         - <I>option</I>
    67         -</DD>
    68         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    69         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    70         -</DD>
    71         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#draw"><B>draw</B></A>
    72         - ?<I>focus</I>?
    73         -</DD>
    74         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#enddialog"><B>enddialog</B></A>
    75         - <I>result</I>
    76         -</DD>
    77         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    78         -</DD>
    79         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
    80         - <I>index</I>
    81         -</DD>
    82         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
    83         - <I>index</I>
    84         - <I>option</I>
    85         -</DD>
    86         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
    87         - <I>index</I>
    88         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    89         -</DD>
    90         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
    91         - <I>index</I>
    92         -</DD>
    93         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#withdraw"><B>withdraw</B></A>
    94         -</DD>
    95         -</DL>
    96         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    97         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    98         -<P>
    99         -
   100         -Dialog widget enables the user to create a dialog box.
   101         -Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
   102         -Button it work. This index is the same specified for equivalent ButtonBox command:
   103         -<P>
   104         -<DL COMPACT>
   105         -<DT>
   106         -<I>number</I>
   107         -<DD>
   108         -Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
   109         -to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
   110         -<DT>
   111         -<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
   112         -<DD>
   113         -Indicates the last item added.
   114         -<DT><B>default</B>
   115         -<DD>
   116         -Indicates the default Button.
   117         -</DL>
   118         -
   119         -</P>
   120         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   121         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   122         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-anchor"><B>-anchor (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   123         -<DD>
   124         -
   125         -Specifies the anchor point of the ButtonBox.
   126         -Must be one of <B>w</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>n</B>, <B>s</B> or <B>c</B>.
   127         -If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>top</I> or <I>bottom</I>,
   128         -<B>anchor</B> values <I>n</I>, <I>s</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
   129         -If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>left</I> or <I>right</I>,
   130         -<B>anchor</B> values <I>w</I>, <I>e</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
   131         -
   132         -</DD>
   133         -</DL>
   134         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-bitmap"><B>-bitmap (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   135         -<DD>
   136         -
   137         -Specifies a bitmap to display at the left of the user frame.
   138         -<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
   139         -</DD>
   140         -</DL>
   141         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-cancel"><B>-cancel</B></A></DT>
   142         -<DD>
   143         -
   144         -Specifies the number of the cancel button of the Dialog. When user presses Esc or the windows close button,
   145         -this button is invoked.<BR>
   146         -If set to <B>-1</B>, Esc does not invoke anything.
   147         -The window close button <I>destroys</I> the dialog in this case and returns <B>-1</B>.
   148         -</DD>
   149         -</DL>
   150         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
   151         -<DD>
   152         -
   153         -Specifies the number of the default button of the Dialog.
   154         -When user press Return in the Dialog, this button is invoked.
   155         -</DD>
   156         -</DL>
   157         -</DL>
   158         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-geometry"><B>-geometry</B></A></DT>
   159         -<DD>
   160         -
   161         -Set the <B>geometry</B> used when method <B>draw</B> is called.
   162         -See <B>wm geometry</B> for a parameter description.
   163         -</DD>
   164         -</DL>
   165         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-image"><B>-image (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   166         -<DD>
   167         -
   168         -Specifies an image to display at the left of the user frame.
   169         -<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
   170         -</DD>
   171         -</DL>
   172         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-modal"><B>-modal</B></A></DT>
   173         -<DD>
   174         -
   175         -This option must be <B>none</B>, <B>local</B> or <B>global</B>. The value of this option
   176         -specifies the grab mode of the dialog and how works Dialog::<B>draw</B>.
   177         -
   178         -</DD>
   179         -</DL>
   180         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
   181         -<DD>
   182         -
   183         -Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is placed relative to its parent. If empty, it is
   184         -placed relative to the root window. Also see <B>place</B> option.
   185         -
   186         -</DD>
   187         -</DL>
   188         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-place"><B>-place</B></A></DT>
   189         -<DD>
   190         -Specifies where to draw the Dialog toplevel relative to the dialog's
   191         -parent. Must be one of <B>none</B>, <B>center</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>right</B>,
   192         -<B>above</B>, <B>below</B>. Default value of <B>place</B> is <I>center</I>.
   193         -
   194         -</DD>
   195         -</DL>
   196         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   197         -<DD>
   198         -
   199         -Specifies wether or not to draw a separator between the user frame and the ButtonBox.
   200         -
   201         -</DD>
   202         -</DL>
   203         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   204         -<DD>
   205         -
   206         -Specifies where to draw the ButtonBox relative to the user frame. Must be one of
   207         -<B>top</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>right</B>.
   208         -</DD>
   209         -</DL>
   210         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
   211         -<DD>
   212         -
   213         -Title of the Dialog toplevel.
   214         -
   215         -</DD>
   216         -</DL>
   217         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-transient"><B>-transient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   218         -<DD>
   219         -
   220         -Specifies if the Dialog Toplevel should be a transient window or not. Default
   221         -value of <B>transient</B> is <I>true</I>.
   222         -
   223         -</DD>
   224         -</DL>
   225         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   226         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   227         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
   228         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   229         -</DT><DD>
   230         -
   231         -Add a button to the button box of the dialog box. Default -command option is
   232         -<I>Dialog::enddialog $path index</I> where <I>index</I> is number of button added.
   233         -</DD></DL>
   234         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   235         - <I>option</I>
   236         -</DT><DD>
   237         -
   238         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   239         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   240         -</DD></DL>
   241         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   242         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   243         -</DT><DD>
   244         -
   245         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   246         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   247         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   248         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   249         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   250         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   251         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   252         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   253         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   254         -
   255         -</DD></DL>
   256         -<DL><DT><A NAME="draw"><I>pathName</I> <B>draw</B></A>
   257         - ?<I>focus</I>?
   258         -</DT><DD>
   259         -
   260         -This command draw the Dialog, and set grab to it following <B>modal</B> option.
   261         -If <B>modal</B> option is set to <I>none</I>, the command returns immediatly
   262         -an empty string. In all other case, the command returns when Dialog::<B>enddialog</B>
   263         -is called or when Dialog is destroyed.
   264         -The return value is the result argument of Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> or -1 if it is destroyed.
   265         -<P>
   266         -By default, the focus is set to the default button referenced by <B>default</B> option,
   267         -or to the toplevel of Dialog if no default button has been set.
   268         -If <I>focus</I> is present, it must be a pathname, or an index to a button.
   269         -Initial focus is set on this pathname or corresponding button.
   270         -
   271         -</DD></DL>
   272         -<DL><DT><A NAME="enddialog"><I>pathName</I> <B>enddialog</B></A>
   273         - <I>result</I>
   274         -</DT><DD>
   275         -
   276         -This command is typically called within a command of a button to make Dialog::<B>draw</B>
   277         -return.
   278         -
   279         -</DD></DL>
   280         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   281         -</DT><DD>
   282         -
   283         -Returns the pathname of the user window.
   284         -</DD></DL>
   285         -<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
   286         - <I>index</I>
   287         -</DT><DD>
   288         -
   289         -Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.
   290         -
   291         -</DD></DL>
   292         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
   293         - <I>index</I>
   294         - <I>option</I>
   295         -</DT><DD>
   296         -
   297         -Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
   298         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
   299         -
   300         -</DD></DL>
   301         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   302         - <I>index</I>
   303         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   304         -</DT><DD>
   305         -
   306         -This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
   307         -options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
   308         -the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
   309         -item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
   310         -in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
   311         -returns a list describing the current options for the item.
   312         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   313         -
   314         -</DD></DL>
   315         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
   316         - <I>index</I>
   317         -</DT><DD>
   318         -
   319         -Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.
   320         -
   321         -</DD></DL>
   322         -<DL><DT><A NAME="withdraw"><I>pathName</I> <B>withdraw</B></A>
   323         -</DT><DD>
   324         -
   325         -Call this command to hide the dialog box.
   326         -
   327         -</DD></DL>
   328         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DragSite.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>DragSite</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>DragSite</B>
     6         - - Commands set for Drag facilities
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    10         -<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
    11         - <I>class</I>
    12         - <I>type</I>
    13         - <I>event</I>
    14         -</DD>
    15         -<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
    16         - <I>path</I>
    17         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    18         -</DD>
    19         -<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#setdrag"><B>setdrag</B></A>
    20         - <I>path</I>
    21         - <I>subpath</I>
    22         - <I>initcmd</I>
    23         - <I>endcmd</I>
    24         - ?<I>force</I>?
    25         -</DD>
    26         -</DL>
    27         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    28         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    29         -<P>
    30         -
    31         -Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drag site.
    32         -
    33         -
    34         -
    35         -</P>
    36         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    37         -<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    38         -<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DragSite::<B>include</B></A>
    39         - <I>class</I>
    40         - <I>type</I>
    41         - <I>event</I>
    42         -</DT><DD>
    43         -
    44         -This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drag site into
    45         -BWidget resources definition.
    46         -It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>: <I>-dragevent</I>, initialized to
    47         -<I>event</I>, <I>-draginitcmd</I> and <I>-dragendcmd</I>, initialized to empty string,
    48         -and two new options:
    49         -<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
    50         -<TR><TD><I>-dragenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drag is active (initialized to 0)
    51         -<TR><TD><I>-dragtype</I><TD>Default or alternate dragged data type (initialized to <I>type</I>)
    52         -</TABLE>
    53         -
    54         -</DD></DL>
    55         -<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DragSite::<B>register</B></A>
    56         - <I>path</I>
    57         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    58         -</DT><DD>
    59         -
    60         -This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drag site. Options are:
    61         -
    62         -<P>
    63         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
    64         -<DD>
    65         -
    66         -Command called when drag terminates (ie when user release drag icon).
    67         -This command is called with the following arguments:
    68         -<UL>
    69         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source (the widget itself),
    70         -<LI>the pathname of the drop target,
    71         -<LI>the operation,
    72         -<LI>the type of the dragged data,
    73         -<LI>the dragged data,
    74         -<LI>result of the drop (result of the call to <B>-dropcmd</B> of the target),
    75         -</UL>
    76         -If the drop does not occurs, the target and the operation are empty string and the result
    77         -is 0.
    78         -
    79         -</DD>
    80         -</DL>
    81         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
    82         -<DD>
    83         -
    84         -Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
    85         -Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
    86         -
    87         -</DD>
    88         -</DL>
    89         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
    90         -<DD>
    91         -
    92         -Command called when drag initiates. When the event of option <B>dragevent</B> occurs on
    93         -<I>path</I>, this command is called with the following arguments:
    94         -<UL>
    95         -<LI>pathname of the drag source (<I>path</I>),
    96         -<LI>root x-coordinate of pointer,
    97         -<LI>root y-coordinate of pointer,
    98         -<LI>a toplevel created to represent dragged data. When returning, if it
    99         -has no children, a bitmap is automatically displayed.
   100         -</UL>
   101         -If the command returns an empty string, then the drag will be
   102         -suppressed.  Otherwise the command must return a list containing three
   103         -elements:
   104         -<UL>
   105         -<LI>the type of the data,
   106         -<LI>the list of acceptable basic operations (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> and <B>link</B>)
   107         -<LI>and the data.
   108         -</UL>
   109         -Note that even if <B>copy</B> does not appear in the list of basic
   110         -operation, it is considered as an acceptable operation, since
   111         -<B>copy</B> semantic does not modify the drag source.
   112         -
   113         -</DD>
   114         -</DL>
   115         -</DD></DL>
   116         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrag">DragSite::<B>setdrag</B></A>
   117         - <I>path</I>
   118         - <I>subpath</I>
   119         - <I>initcmd</I>
   120         - <I>endcmd</I>
   121         - ?<I>force</I>?
   122         -</DT><DD>
   123         -
   124         -This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
   125         -configuration.
   126         -<UL>
   127         -<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
   128         -<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
   129         -<LI><I>initcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-init</I> event,
   130         -<LI><I>endcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-end</I> event,
   131         -<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value has
   132         -changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
   133         -</UL>
   134         -<B>setdrag</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dragenabled</B> and
   135         -<B>dragevent</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
   136         -<I>initcmd</I> and <I>endcmd</I> arguments. <B>draginitcmd</B> and <B>dragendcmd</B> are not
   137         -taken from options of widget  because they are considered as user command, called by
   138         -BWidget implementation of <I>drag-init</I> and <I>drag-end</I> events.
   139         -
   140         -</DD></DL>
   141         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DropSite.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>DropSite</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>DropSite</B>
     6         - - Commands set for Drop facilities
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    10         -<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
    11         - <I>class</I>
    12         - <I>types</I>
    13         -</DD>
    14         -<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
    15         - <I>path</I>
    16         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    17         -</DD>
    18         -<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setcursor"><B>setcursor</B></A>
    19         - <I>cursor</I>
    20         -</DD>
    21         -<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setdrop"><B>setdrop</B></A>
    22         - <I>path</I>
    23         - <I>subpath</I>
    24         - <I>dropover</I>
    25         - <I>drop</I>
    26         - ?<I>force</I>?
    27         -</DD>
    28         -<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setoperation"><B>setoperation</B></A>
    29         - <I>op</I>
    30         -</DD>
    31         -</DL>
    32         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    33         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    34         -<P>
    35         -
    36         -Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drop site.
    37         -A drop site is composed of the type of object that can be dropped and associated operation,
    38         -a command called when drop occurs, and a command when an object is dragged over the widget.
    39         -A drop site must have at least one type of acceptable object and a drop command.
    40         -
    41         -</P>
    42         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    43         -<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    44         -<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DropSite::<B>include</B></A>
    45         - <I>class</I>
    46         - <I>types</I>
    47         -</DT><DD>
    48         -
    49         -This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drop site into
    50         -BWidget resources definition.
    51         -It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>, <I>-dropovercmd</I> and <I>-dropcmd</I>,
    52         -initialized to empty string, and <I>-droptypes</I>, initialized to <I>types</I>,
    53         -and one new option:
    54         -<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
    55         -<TR><TD><I>-dropenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drop is active (initialized to 0)
    56         -</TABLE>
    57         -
    58         -</DD></DL>
    59         -<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DropSite::<B>register</B></A>
    60         - <I>path</I>
    61         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    62         -</DT><DD>
    63         -
    64         -This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drop site. Options are:
    65         -
    66         -<P>
    67         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
    68         -<DD>
    69         -
    70         -This command is called when user release the drag icon over a valid
    71         -drop target widget.  Arguments passed to the command are:
    72         -
    73         -<UL>
    74         -<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
    75         -<LI>pathname of the drag source,
    76         -<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
    77         -<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
    78         -<LI>operation,
    79         -<LI>type of the dragged data,
    80         -<LI>dragged data.
    81         -</UL>
    82         -
    83         -Its return values is passed as a result to the <B>-dragendcmd</B>
    84         -command of the drag source widget.
    85         -
    86         -</DD>
    87         -</DL>
    88         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
    89         -<DD>
    90         -
    91         -This command can be used to provide a dynamic drag while <I>drag-over</I> events.
    92         -While a drag occurs, events &lt;Enter&gt;, &lt;Motion&gt; and &lt;Leave&gt; are catched.
    93         -Arguments passed to the command are:
    94         -<UL>
    95         -<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
    96         -<LI>pathname of the drag source,
    97         -<LI>event over the drop target: <I>enter</I>, <I>motion</I> or <I>leave</I>,
    98         -<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
    99         -<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
   100         -<LI>operation,
   101         -<LI>type of the dragged data,
   102         -<LI>dragged data.
   103         -</UL>
   104         -Command must the new status of the drag:
   105         -<UL>
   106         -<LI>0  if widget refuse this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
   107         -<LI>1  if widget accept this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
   108         -<LI>2  if widget refuse this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
   109         -<LI>3  if widget accept this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
   110         -
   111         -</UL>
   112         -Here is a list of events and associated actions on a DropSite widget. This example
   113         -assumes that dragged data type is valid for the drop target.
   114         -<B>status</B> is the status of the drag on a DropSite. Its value is:
   115         -<BR><BR>
   116         -
   117         -<TABLE BORDER CELLSPACING=1 CELLPADDING=4>
   118         -<TR>
   119         -<TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Event</TD>
   120         -<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Old status</TD>
   121         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Action</TD>
   122         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">New status</TD>
   123         -</TR>
   124         -<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
   125         -<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Enter&gt;</FONT></TD>
   126         -<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
   127         -<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
   128         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   129         -<FONT SIZE=2>if DropSite has <B>dropovercmd</B>, call it with <I>enter</I></FONT></TD>
   130         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   131         -<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
   132         -</TR>
   133         -<TR><TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   134         -<FONT SIZE=2>else</FONT></TD>
   135         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   136         -<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
   137         -</TR>
   138         -<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
   139         -<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Motion&gt;</FONT></TD>
   140         -<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   141         -<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
   142         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
   143         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   144         -<FONT SIZE=2>unchanged</FONT></TD>
   145         -</TR>
   146         -<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   147         -<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
   148         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   149         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>motion</I></FONT></TD>
   150         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   151         -<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
   152         -</TR>
   153         -<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
   154         -<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Leave&gt;</FONT>&nbsp;</TD>
   155         -<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   156         -<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
   157         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
   158         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   159         -<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
   160         -</TR>
   161         -<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   162         -<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
   163         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   164         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I></FONT></TD>
   165         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
   166         -<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
   167         -</TR>
   168         -<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
   169         -<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Drop&gt;</FONT></TD>
   170         -<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   171         -<FONT SIZE=2>0</FONT></TD>
   172         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   173         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
   174         -<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
   175         -<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
   176         -</TR>
   177         -<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   178         -<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
   179         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   180         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
   181         -</TR>
   182         -<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   183         -<FONT SIZE=2>2</FONT></TD>
   184         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   185         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
   186         -</TR>
   187         -<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
   188         -<FONT SIZE=2>3</FONT></TD>
   189         -<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
   190         -<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
   191         -</TR>
   192         -</TABLE>
   193         -<BR>
   194         -
   195         -</DD>
   196         -</DL>
   197         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
   198         -<DD>
   199         -
   200         -Specifies a list {<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I> ?<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I>? ...} of acceptable
   201         -types and associated operations for the drop target.
   202         -For each type, <I>oplist</I> is a list
   203         -{<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I> ?<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I>? ...} describing operations and
   204         -modifier keys for these operations.
   205         -<I>descops</I> describe an operation. It can be a predefined operations (<B>copy</B>,
   206         -<B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) or a new user defined operation, of the form {<I>subop</I>
   207         -<B>baseop</B> ?<I>bitmap</I>?}.
   208         -<I>subop</I> is the name given to the sub operation, <I>baseop</I> is the name of the
   209         -base operation (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) and <I>bitmap</I> is a bitmap
   210         -to display for the operation.
   211         -<BR>If <I>bitmap</I> is empty, the default bitmap of the base operation is used for the
   212         -sub operation.
   213         -<BR><I>subop</I> can be a base operation, in order to change the bitmap of a base operation.
   214         -In this case, <I>baseop</I> must be empty or equal to <I>subop</I>.
   215         -<BR><I>mod</I> is the modifer key for the operation. It can be:
   216         -<UL>
   217         -<LI><B>none</B> to specify that no modifier key is pressed. This modifier can only be used
   218         -with a sub operation named <B>default</B> (and vice versa), which has the behaviour of not
   219         -display any bitmap operation. For all type, if the modifier <B>none</B> is not given, it is
   220         -automatically associated to the <B>default</B> sub operation of a <B>copy</B> base operation.
   221         -<LI><B>program</B> to specifies a sub operation accessible only by <B>DropSite::setoperation</B>.
   222         -<LI>A list combining <B>shift</B>, <B>control</B> and <B>alt</B>, which means their 
   223         -corresponding key.
   224         -</UL>
   225         -
   226         -</DD>
   227         -</DL>
   228         -</DD></DL>
   229         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setcursor">DropSite::<B>setcursor</B></A>
   230         - <I>cursor</I>
   231         -</DT><DD>
   232         -
   233         -This command can be used within the script <B>dragovercmd</B>. It is usefull to provide
   234         -visual effect about the state of the drag.
   235         -</DD></DL>
   236         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrop">DropSite::<B>setdrop</B></A>
   237         - <I>path</I>
   238         - <I>subpath</I>
   239         - <I>dropover</I>
   240         - <I>drop</I>
   241         - ?<I>force</I>?
   242         -</DT><DD>
   243         -
   244         -This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
   245         -configuration.
   246         -<UL>
   247         -<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
   248         -<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
   249         -<LI><I>dropover</I> is a command for <I>drag-over</I> event,
   250         -<LI><I>drop</I> is a command for <I>drop</I> event,
   251         -<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value
   252         -has changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
   253         -</UL>
   254         -<B>setdrop</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dropenabled</B> and
   255         -<B>droptypes</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
   256         -<I>dropover</I> and <I>drop</I> arguments. <B>dropovercmd</B> and <B>dropcmd</B> are not
   257         -taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by
   258         -BWidget implementation of <I>drag-over</I> and <I>drop</I> events.
   259         -
   260         -</DD></DL>
   261         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setoperation">DropSite::<B>setoperation</B></A>
   262         - <I>op</I>
   263         -</DT><DD>
   264         -Description text
   265         -</DD></DL>
   266         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/DynamicHelp.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>DynamicHelp</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>DynamicHelp</B>
     6         - - Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    10         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
    11         -<i>widget</i> ?<I>option value ...</I>?
    12         -</DD>
    13         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    14         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    15         -</DD>
    16         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
    17         -<i>widget</i>
    18         -</DD>
    19         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
    20         - <I>class</I>
    21         - <I>type</I>
    22         -</DD>
    23         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
    24         - <I>path</I>
    25         - <I>type</I>
    26         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    27         -</DD>
    28         -<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#sethelp"><B>sethelp</B></A>
    29         - <I>path</I>
    30         - <I>subpath</I>
    31         - ?<I>force</I>?
    32         -</DD>
    33         -</DL>
    34         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    35         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    36         -<P>
    37         -Description text
    38         -</P>
    39         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    40         -<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    41         -
    42         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add">DynamicHelp::<B>add</B></A>
    43         - ?<I>option value ...</I>?
    44         -</DT><DD>
    45         -<p>
    46         -This command adds dynamic help to the given <i>widget</i>.
    47         -</p>
    48         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
    49         -    <DD>
    50         -    	If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help
    51         -	text to display.  The command must return a string to display.
    52         -	If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed.
    53         -    </DD>
    54         -    </DL>
    55         -
    56         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-index"><B>-index</B></A></DT>
    57         -    <DD>
    58         -	If specified, refers to a menu index to bind the help to instead of
    59         -	a widget.  If <b>-type</b> is not menu, this option is ignored.
    60         -    </DD>
    61         -    </DL>
    62         -
    63         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-item"><B>-item</B></A></DT>
    64         -    <DD>
    65         -    	If specified, refers to an item or tag on a canvas widget or to a tag
    66         -        in a text widget to bind the help to instead of to a widget.
    67         -    </DD>
    68         -    </DL>
    69         -
    70         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
    71         -    <DD>
    72         -	Specifies the type of help.  Can be:
    73         -	<b>balloon</b>, <b>variable</b> or <b>menu</b>.
    74         -	Default is <b>balloon</b>.
    75         -    </DD>
    76         -    </DL>
    77         -
    78         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
    79         -    <DD>
    80         -    	The text to be displayed as help.
    81         -    </DD>
    82         -    </DL>
    83         -
    84         -    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
    85         -    <DD>
    86         -    	Specifies a variable name to which the help string will be
    87         -        written.  Some other widget (e.g., a status bar) is
    88         -        responsible for displaying this variable.
    89         -    </DD>
    90         -    </DL>
    91         -
    92         -    <p>
    93         -    Creating dynamic help for a menu is a two-step process.  The menu
    94         -    itself must first be added and then each menu entry must be added
    95         -    separately.  Here is a brief example.
    96         -    </p>
    97         -
    98         -    <TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
    99         -    <TR><TD><PRE>
   100         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
   101         -    menu .m -type menubar
   102         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
   103         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
   104         -    . configure -menu .m
   105         -    .m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
   106         -    menu .m.file
   107         -    .m.file add command -label "Open..."
   108         -    .m.file add command -label "Quit"
   109         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
   110         -    label .l -textvariable varinfo
   111         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
   112         -    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -variable varinfo
   113         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
   114         -    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 0 -text "Detach menu"
   115         -    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 1 -text "Open a file"
   116         -    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 2 -text "Exit demo"
   117         -    </PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
   118         -
   119         -</DL>
   120         -
   121         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">DynamicHelp::<B>configure</B></A>
   122         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   123         -</DT><DD>
   124         -This command configure the ballon help.
   125         -<P>
   126         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-borderwidth"><B>-borderwidth</B></A></DT>
   127         -<DD>
   128         -Width of the black border around the balloon.
   129         -</DD>
   130         -</DL>
   131         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-delay"><B>-delay</B></A></DT>
   132         -<DD>
   133         -Define the delay in millisecond of mouse inactivity before displaying
   134         -the balloon.
   135         -</DD>
   136         -</DL>
   137         -<dl>
   138         -    <dt><a name="DynamicHelp-state"><b>-state</b></a></dt>
   139         -    <dd>
   140         -    Specifies one of two states for help balloons: <b>normal</b> and
   141         -    <b>disabled</b>.
   142         -    </dd>
   143         -    <dd>
   144         -    If <b>state</b> is <b>disabled</b>, help balloons will not be displayed
   145         -    for any registered widget.
   146         -    </dd>
   147         -</dl>
   148         -<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-topbackground"><B>-topbackground</B></A></DT>
   149         -<DD>
   150         -The background color of the toplevel window created for a balloon.
   151         -</DD>
   152         -</DL>
   153         -<BR>Other standard options are:
   154         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
   155         -<TR>
   156         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
   157         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
   158         -</TR>
   159         -<TR>
   160         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
   161         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
   162         -</TR>
   163         -<TR>
   164         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
   165         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
   166         -</TR>
   167         -</TABLE></DD>
   168         -</DD></DL>
   169         -
   170         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete">DynamicHelp::<B>delete</B></A>
   171         - <I>widget</I>
   172         -</DT><DD>
   173         -    Delete all dynamic help for the given <i>widget</i>.
   174         -</DD></DL>
   175         -
   176         -<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DynamicHelp::<B>include</B></A>
   177         - <I>class</I>
   178         - <I>type</I>
   179         -</DT><DD>
   180         -Description text
   181         -</DD></DL>
   182         -<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DynamicHelp::<B>register</B></A>
   183         - <I>path</I>
   184         - <I>type</I>
   185         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   186         -</DT><DD>
   187         -<p>
   188         -<b>Its use is deprecated.  Use <i>DynamicHelp::add</i> instead.</b>
   189         -</p>
   190         -
   191         -Register a help text to the widget <I>path</I>.
   192         -<I>type</I> determines the type of the help or the type of the widget.
   193         -Depending on <I>type</I>, other options must be provided.
   194         -<BR>
   195         -<TABLE CELLSPACING=5 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
   196         -<TR><TD><B>    type      </B></TD><TD><B>     options      </B></TD></TR>
   197         -<TR><TD><B><I> balloon   </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? text </I></TD></TR>
   198         -<TR><TD><B><I> variable  </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? varName text </I></TD></TR>
   199         -<TR><TD><B><I> menu      </I></B></TD><TD><I> varName      </I></TD></TR>
   200         -<TR><TD><B><I> menuentry </I></B></TD><TD><I> index text   </I></TD></TR>
   201         -</TABLE>
   202         -<BR>If one of the option is missing or is empty, help is removed for this widget.
   203         -<p>
   204         -
   205         -If <i>tagOrItem</i> is specified, then <i>path</i> is a canvas or a text. In
   206         -case of a canvas, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the name of a tag or item on the canvas
   207         -to which the help will be bound. In case of a text, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the
   208         -name of a tag on the text to which the help will be bound.
   209         -
   210         -</p>
   211         -For type other than <I>balloon</I>, <I>varName</I> is typically a variable
   212         -linked to a label.
   213         -<BR>For menu, balloon type help is not available. To declare a help for menu,
   214         -you first declare the menu, and then entries of this menu.
   215         -<BR>For example:
   216         -<BR><BR>
   217         -<CENTER>
   218         -<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
   219         -<TR><TD><PRE>
   220         -     <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
   221         -menu .m -type menubar
   222         -<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
   223         -<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
   224         -. configure -menu .m
   225         -.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
   226         -menu .m.file
   227         -.m.file add command -label "Open..."
   228         -.m.file add command -label "Quit"
   229         -<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
   230         -label .l -textvariable varinfo
   231         -<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
   232         -DynamicHelp::register .m.file menu varinfo
   233         -<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
   234         -DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 0 "Detach menu"
   235         -DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 1 "Open a file"
   236         -DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 2 "Exit demo"
   237         -</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
   238         -<BR>
   239         -<BR>Notice that if popup menu is owned by a menubar, you must associate first the menubar
   240         -to its toplevel. In this case, when you create a menu popup, its clone window is also
   241         -created, and DynamicHelp::register detects the exitence of the clone window and maps
   242         -events to it.
   243         -</DD></DL>
   244         -<DL><DT><A NAME="sethelp">DynamicHelp::<B>sethelp</B></A>
   245         - <I>path</I>
   246         - <I>subpath</I>
   247         - ?<I>force</I>?
   248         -</DT><DD>
   249         -Description text
   250         -</DD></DL>
   251         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Entry.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Entry</B>
     6         - - Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Entry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
    15         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    16         -<TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    18         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    19         -</TR>
    20         -<TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></TD>
    22         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
    23         -</TR>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></TD>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></TD>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
    63         -</TABLE></DD>
    64         -</DL>
    65         -<DL>
    66         -<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
    67         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    68         -<TR>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
    71         -</TR>
    72         -<TR>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
    75         -</TR>
    76         -<TR>
    77         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
    79         -</TR>
    80         -<TR>
    81         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
    83         -</TR>
    84         -<TR>
    85         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
    86         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
    87         -</TABLE></DD>
    88         -</DL>
    89         -<DL>
    90         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    91         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    92         -<TR>
    93         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
    94         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
    95         -</TR>
    96         -<TR>
    97         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
    98         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
    99         -</TR>
   100         -<TR>
   101         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
   102         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
   103         -</TR>
   104         -<TR>
   105         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
   106         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
   107         -</TR>
   108         -<TR>
   109         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
   110         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
   111         -</TR>
   112         -<TR>
   113         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-editable">-editable</A></TD>
   114         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
   115         -</TR>
   116         -<TR>
   117         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
   118         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
   119         -</TR>
   120         -<TR>
   121         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-show">-show</A></TD>
   122         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
   123         -</TR>
   124         -<TR>
   125         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
   126         -</TABLE></DD>
   127         -</DL>
   128         -<DL>
   129         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   130         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   131         - <I>option</I>
   132         -</DD>
   133         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   134         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   135         -</DD>
   136         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
   137         -</DD>
   138         -</DL>
   139         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   140         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   141         -<P>
   142         -
   143         -The <B>Entry</B> widget extends the default Tk entry. Options have been added to provide
   144         -visual effect depending on the state of the Entry,
   145         -<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
   146         -and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag</A> and
   147         -<A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
   148         -Entry behaves much like a Label, with <B>text</B> option to set its contents.
   149         -<BR>Tk entry command can also be used on Entry widget.
   150         -
   151         -</P>
   152         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   153         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   154         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
   155         -<DD>
   156         -
   157         -Specifies a command when user press &lt;Return&gt; in the Entry.
   158         -</DD>
   159         -</DL>
   160         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
   161         -<DD>
   162         -A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
   163         -</DD>
   164         -</DL>
   165         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
   166         -<DD>
   167         -
   168         -Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
   169         -<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   170         -option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   171         -
   172         -<BR>If <B>dragendcmd</B> is empty, the internal <I>dragend</I> command updates the entry
   173         -following the operation (<B>move</B> or <B>copy</B>) and the dragged data
   174         -(whole or selected part of the entry).
   175         -
   176         -</DD>
   177         -</DL>
   178         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
   179         -<DD>
   180         -
   181         -Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
   182         -Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
   183         -
   184         -</DD>
   185         -</DL>
   186         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
   187         -<DD>
   188         -
   189         -Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
   190         -<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   191         -option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   192         -
   193         -<BR>if <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the command refuse the drag if entry is empty or if
   194         -portion of text is selected and event doesn't occur above the selection. In all other cases,
   195         -the command returns:
   196         -<UL>
   197         -<LI>as the data type, the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TEXT</I> if empty,
   198         -<LI>as the operations, <I>{copy move}</I> if <B>state</B> is normal and <B>editable</B>
   199         -is true, or <I>{copy}</I> only in other cases, 
   200         -<LI>as the data, the whole content or the selected portion of the entry.
   201         -</UL>
   202         -
   203         -</DD>
   204         -</DL>
   205         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
   206         -<DD>
   207         -
   208         -Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
   209         -
   210         -</DD>
   211         -</DL>
   212         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
   213         -<DD>
   214         -
   215         -Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
   216         -and extract current position.
   217         -<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   218         -<UL>
   219         -<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
   220         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   221         -<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
   222         -<LI>the current operation,
   223         -<LI>the data type,
   224         -<LI>the data.
   225         -</UL>
   226         -and must return a value conforming to <B>dropcmd</B> option described in
   227         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   228         -If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the wrapper updates the entry following the type of data:
   229         -<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
   230         -<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
   231         -<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Entry</TD>
   232         -<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
   233         -<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Entry</TD>
   234         -<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
   235         -<TD>reconfigure the Entry to display the associated string.</TD>
   236         -</TABLE></DL>
   237         -and returns 1.
   238         -
   239         -</DD>
   240         -</DL>
   241         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
   242         -<DD>
   243         -A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
   244         -</DD>
   245         -</DL>
   246         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
   247         -<DD>
   248         -
   249         -Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
   250         -and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
   251         -<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, the wrapper accepts the drop if <B>editable</b> option is
   252         -true and <B>state</B> option is normal.
   253         -<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   254         -<UL>
   255         -<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
   256         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   257         -<LI>the event,
   258         -<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
   259         -<LI>the current operation,
   260         -<LI>the data type,
   261         -<LI>the data.
   262         -</UL>
   263         -and must return a value conforming to <B>dropovercmd</B> option described in
   264         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   265         -
   266         -</DD>
   267         -</DL>
   268         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
   269         -<DD>
   270         -
   271         -Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
   272         -See option <B>droptypes</B> of
   273         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   274         -for more infromation.
   275         -
   276         -Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I> and <I>TEXT</I>,
   277         -all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
   278         -
   279         -</DD>
   280         -</DL>
   281         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-editable"><B>-editable</B></A></DT>
   282         -<DD>
   283         -
   284         -Specifies whether the Entry is editable by the user. Equivalent to the <B>state</B> option
   285         -of the Tk entry widget.
   286         -</DD>
   287         -</DL>
   288         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
   289         -<DD>
   290         -
   291         -Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
   292         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   293         -</DD>
   294         -</DL>
   295         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
   296         -<DD>
   297         -Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
   298         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   299         -</DD>
   300         -</DL>
   301         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
   302         -<DD>
   303         -Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
   304         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   305         -</DD>
   306         -</DL>
   307         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-show"><B>-show</B></A></DT>
   308         -<DD>
   309         -
   310         -If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the
   311         -window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character
   312         -in the value of this option, such as ``*''. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to
   313         -be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
   314         -information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry.
   315         -</DD>
   316         -</DL>
   317         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   318         -<DD>
   319         -
   320         -Specifies one of two states for the Entry:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
   321         -In normal state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
   322         -In disabled state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B>
   323         -option. If the entry is disabled then the value may not be changed by user input
   324         -and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget.
   325         -Disabled state is the same as not editable with visual effect.
   326         -</DD>
   327         -</DL>
   328         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   329         -<DD>
   330         -
   331         -Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size
   332         -characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks
   333         -a size just large enough to hold its current text.
   334         -</DD>
   335         -</DL>
   336         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   337         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   338         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   339         - <I>option</I>
   340         -</DT><DD>
   341         -
   342         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   343         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   344         -</DD></DL>
   345         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   346         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   347         -</DT><DD>
   348         -
   349         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   350         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   351         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   352         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   353         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   354         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   355         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   356         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   357         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   358         -
   359         -</DD></DL>
   360         -<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
   361         -</DT><DD>
   362         -
   363         -Calls the command specified by the option <B>-command</B>.
   364         -
   365         -</DD></DL>
   366         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Label.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Label</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Label</B>
     6         - - Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Label</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
    15         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    16         -<TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
    18         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    19         -</TR>
    20         -<TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
    22         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    23         -</TR>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TR>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -</TABLE></DD>
    57         -<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
    58         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    59         -<TR>
    60         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    62         -</TR>
    63         -<TR>
    64         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD></TR>
    65         -<TR>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    67         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    68         -</TR>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
    70         -</TR>
    71         -<TR>
    72         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
    73         -</TR>
    74         -<TR>
    75         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    76         -</TR>
    77         -<TR>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
    79         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
    80         -</TR>
    81         -<TR>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
    83         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
    84         -</TR>
    85         -</TABLE></DD>
    86         -</DL>
    87         -<DL>
    88         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    89         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    90         -<TR>
    91         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TR>
    92         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TR>
    93         -</TR>
    94         -<TR>
    95         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TR>
    96         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TR>
    97         -</TR>
    98         -<TR>
    99         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TR>
   100         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TR>
   101         -</TR>
   102         -<TR>
   103         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TR>
   104         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TR>
   105         -</TR>
   106         -<TR>
   107         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TR>
   108         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-focus">-focus</A></TR>
   109         -</TR>
   110         -<TR>
   111         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
   112         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
   113         -</TR>
   114         -<TR>
   115         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
   116         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
   117         -</TR>
   118         -<TR>
   119         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TR>
   120         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
   121         -</TR>
   122         -<TR>
   123         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TR>
   124         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
   125         -</TR>
   126         -</TABLE></DD>
   127         -</DL>
   128         -<DL>
   129         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   130         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   131         - <I>option</I>
   132         -</DD>
   133         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   134         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   135         -</DD>
   136         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
   137         -</DD>
   138         -</DL>
   139         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   140         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   141         -<P>
   142         -
   143         -The <B>Label</B> widget extends the default Tk label. Options have been added to provide
   144         -visual effect depending on the state of the Label, <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag
   145         -</A> and <A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
   146         -</P>
   147         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   148         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   149         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
   150         -<DD>
   151         -A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
   152         -</DD>
   153         -</DL>
   154         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
   155         -<DD>
   156         -
   157         -Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
   158         -<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   159         -option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   160         -
   161         -</DD>
   162         -</DL>
   163         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
   164         -<DD>
   165         -
   166         -Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
   167         -Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
   168         -
   169         -</DD>
   170         -</DL>
   171         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
   172         -<DD>
   173         -
   174         -Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
   175         -<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   176         -option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   177         -
   178         -<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the internal <B>draginitcmd</B> command is used instead
   179         -and returns:
   180         -<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
   181         -<TR><TD valign=top><I>IMAGE&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;image&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
   182         -<TD>if an image is displayed.
   183         -<TR><TD valign=top><I>BITMAP&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;bitmap&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
   184         -<TD>if a bitmap is displayed.
   185         -<TR><TD valign=top><I>TEXT&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;text&gt;</I>
   186         -<TD>if a text is displayed.
   187         -</TABLE></DL>
   188         -Note that if <B>dragtype</B> option is not empty, its value is used instead of those above.
   189         -
   190         -</DD>
   191         -</DL>
   192         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
   193         -<DD>
   194         -
   195         -Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
   196         -
   197         -</DD>
   198         -</DL>
   199         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
   200         -<DD>
   201         -
   202         -Specifies a command to be called when drop occurs on the widget.
   203         -<B>dropcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   204         -option <B>dropcmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   205         -
   206         -<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the command updates the label following the type of the data:
   207         -<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
   208         -<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
   209         -<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Label.</TD>
   210         -<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
   211         -<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Label.</TD>
   212         -<TR><TD><I>IMAGE</I></TD>
   213         -<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated image.</TD>
   214         -<TR><TD><I>BITMAP</I></TD>
   215         -<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated bitmap.
   216         -<B>image</B> option is set to empty.</TD>
   217         -<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
   218         -<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated string.
   219         -<B>image</B> and <B>bitmap</B> options are set to empty.</TD>
   220         -</TABLE></DL>
   221         -and returns 1.
   222         -
   223         -</DD>
   224         -</DL>
   225         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
   226         -<DD>
   227         -A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
   228         -</DD>
   229         -</DL>
   230         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
   231         -<DD>
   232         -
   233         -Specifies a command to be called when drag icon is over the widget.
   234         -<B>dropovercmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   235         -option <B>dropovercmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   236         -
   237         -<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, Label always accepts the drop if data type is
   238         -<I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, and accepts all other data type only if
   239         -<B>state</B> is normal.
   240         -
   241         -</DD>
   242         -</DL>
   243         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
   244         -<DD>
   245         -
   246         -Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
   247         -See option <B>droptypes</B> of
   248         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   249         -for more infromation.
   250         -
   251         -Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, <I>TEXT</I>, <I>BITMAP</I>
   252         -and <I>IMAGE</I>, all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.
   253         -
   254         -</DD>
   255         -</DL>
   256         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-focus"><B>-focus</B></A></DT>
   257         -<DD>
   258         -
   259         -Specifies a pathname to set the focus on for Label::<B>setfocus</B> command.
   260         -
   261         -</DD>
   262         -</DL>
   263         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   264         -<DD>
   265         -
   266         -Specifies a desired height for the label.
   267         -If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
   268         -screen units, for text it is in lines of text.
   269         -If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed
   270         -from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
   271         -Option not available for <I>themed</I> widgets.
   272         -</DD>
   273         -</DL>
   274         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
   275         -<DD>
   276         -
   277         -Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
   278         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   279         -</DD>
   280         -</DL>
   281         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
   282         -<DD>
   283         -Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
   284         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   285         -</DD>
   286         -</DL>
   287         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
   288         -<DD>
   289         -Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
   290         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   291         -</DD>
   292         -</DL>
   293         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
   294         -<DD>
   295         -
   296         -Specifies a standard name for the label. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
   297         -found in the resource database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
   298         -are extracted from its value.
   299         -
   300         -</DD>
   301         -</DL>
   302         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   303         -<DD>
   304         -
   305         -Specifies one of two states for the Label:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
   306         -In normal state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
   307         -In disabled state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> option.
   308         -</DD>
   309         -</DL>
   310         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
   311         -<DD>
   312         -
   313         -Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label.
   314         -0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
   315         -and so on.
   316         -<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
   317         -of the Label to call Label::<B>setfocus</B>.
   318         -
   319         -</DD>
   320         -</DL>
   321         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   322         -<DD>
   323         -
   324         -Specifies a desired width for the label.
   325         -If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
   326         -screen units, for text it is in characters.
   327         -If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed
   328         -from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
   329         -
   330         -</DD>
   331         -</DL>
   332         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   333         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   334         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   335         - <I>option</I>
   336         -</DT><DD>
   337         -
   338         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   339         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   340         -</DD></DL>
   341         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   342         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   343         -</DT><DD>
   344         -
   345         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   346         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   347         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   348         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   349         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   350         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   351         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   352         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   353         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   354         -
   355         -</DD></DL>
   356         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
   357         -</DT><DD>
   358         -
   359         -Set the focus on the pathname given by <B>-focus</B> option if <B>-state</B> is <I>normal</I>.
   360         -
   361         -</DD></DL>
   362         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelEntry.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>LabelEntry</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>LabelEntry</B>
     6         - - 
     7         -LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.
     8         -
     9         -</DD></DL>
    10         -<DL>
    11         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    12         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelEntry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    13         -</DL>
    14         -<DL>
    15         -<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
    16         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    17         -<TR>
    18         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
    19         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
    20         -</TR>
    21         -<TR>
    22         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    23         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
    24         -</TR>
    25         -<TR>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
    27         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
    28         -</TR>
    29         -<TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
    32         -</TR>
    33         -<TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
    35         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
    36         -</TR>
    37         -<TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
    40         -</TR>
    41         -<TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
    44         -</TR>
    45         -<TR>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
    47         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
    48         -</TR>
    49         -<TR>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
    51         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
    52         -</TR>
    53         -<TR>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
    55         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
    56         -</TR>
    57         -<TR>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
    59         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
    60         -</TR>
    61         -<TR>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
    63         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
    64         -</TR>
    65         -<TR>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
    67         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
    68         -</TR>
    69         -<TR>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
    71         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
    72         -</TR>
    73         -<TR>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
    75         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
    76         -</TR>
    77         -<TR>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
    79         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
    80         -</TR>
    81         -<TR>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
    83         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
    84         -</TR>
    85         -<TR>
    86         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    87         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
    88         -</TR>
    89         -<TR>
    90         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
    91         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
    92         -</TR>
    93         -<TR>
    94         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
    95         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
    96         -</TR>
    97         -</TABLE></DD>
    98         -</DL>
    99         -<DL>
   100         -<DT><I><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelFrame</B></A></I></DT>
   101         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
   102         -<TR>
   103         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
   104         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
   105         -</TR>
   106         -<TR>
   107         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
   108         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
   109         -</TR>
   110         -<TR>
   111         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
   112         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
   113         -</TR>
   114         -<TR>
   115         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-label (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
   116         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor (see <B>-anchor</B>)</TD>
   117         -</TR>
   118         -<TR>
   119         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont (see <B>-font</B>)</TD>
   120         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight (see <B>-height</B>)</TD>
   121         -</TR>
   122         -<TR>
   123         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify (see <B>-justify</B>)</TD>
   124         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth (see <B>-width</B>)</TD>
   125         -</TR>
   126         -<TR>
   127         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
   128         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
   129         -</TR>
   130         -<TR>
   131         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
   132         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-side</TD>
   133         -</TR>
   134         -<TR>
   135         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
   136         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
   137         -</TR>
   138         -<TR>
   139         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
   140         -</TABLE></DD>
   141         -</DL>
   142         -<DL>
   143         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   144         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
   145         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   146         -</DD>
   147         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   148         - <I>option</I>
   149         -</DD>
   150         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   151         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   152         -</DD>
   153         -</DL>
   154         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   155         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   156         -<P>
   157         -
   158         -LabelEntry is a widget composed of <A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A> widget
   159         -containing an <A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A> widget.
   160         -Tk entry command can also be used on LabelEntry widget.
   161         -
   162         -</P>
   163         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   164         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   165         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
   166         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   167         -</DT><DD>
   168         -
   169         -Set bindings on the entry widget.
   170         -
   171         -</DD></DL>
   172         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   173         - <I>option</I>
   174         -</DT><DD>
   175         -
   176         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   177         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   178         -</DD></DL>
   179         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   180         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   181         -</DT><DD>
   182         -
   183         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   184         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   185         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   186         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   187         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   188         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   189         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   190         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   191         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   192         -
   193         -</DD></DL>
   194         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/LabelFrame.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>LabelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>LabelFrame</B>
     6         - - Frame with a Label
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -</TABLE></DD>
    20         -</DL>
    21         -<DL>
    22         -<DT><I><A HREF="Label.html">OPTIONS from <B>Label</B></A></I></DT>
    23         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-bitmap</TD>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-focus</TD>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-height</TD>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-image</TD>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
    63         -</TR>
    64         -<TR>
    65         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
    67         -</TABLE></DD>
    68         -</DL>
    69         -<DL>
    70         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    71         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    72         -<TR>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
    74         -</TABLE></DD>
    75         -</DL>
    76         -<DL>
    77         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    78         -<DD>LabelFrame::<A HREF="#align"><B>align</B></A>
    79         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    80         -</DD>
    81         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    82         - <I>option</I>
    83         -</DD>
    84         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    85         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    86         -</DD>
    87         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    88         -</DD>
    89         -</DL>
    90         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    91         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    92         -<P>
    93         -
    94         -LabelFrame enables user to create a frame with a
    95         -<A HREF="Label.html">Label</A> positionned at any side.
    96         -LabelFrame is used by <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A>
    97         -and <A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A>.
    98         -</P>
    99         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   100         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   101         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   102         -<DD>
   103         -
   104         -Specifies where to position the Label relative to the user frame: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> or <B>right</B>.
   105         -</DD>
   106         -</DL>
   107         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   108         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   109         -<DL><DT><A NAME="align">LabelFrame::<B>align</B></A>
   110         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   111         -</DT><DD>
   112         -
   113         -This command align label of all widget given by <I>args</I> of class LabelFrame
   114         -(or "derived") by setting their width to the max one +1
   115         -
   116         -</DD></DL>
   117         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   118         - <I>option</I>
   119         -</DT><DD>
   120         -
   121         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   122         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   123         -</DD></DL>
   124         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   125         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   126         -</DT><DD>
   127         -
   128         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   129         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   130         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   131         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   132         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   133         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   134         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   135         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   136         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   137         -
   138         -</DD></DL>
   139         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   140         -</DT><DD>
   141         -
   142         -Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
   143         -</DD></DL>
   144         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ListBox.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ListBox</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ListBox</B>
     6         - - ListBox widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ListBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -<TR>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
    30         -</TR>
    31         -<TR>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    34         -</TR>
    35         -<TR>
    36         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
    38         -</TR>
    39         -</TABLE></DD>
    40         -</DL>
    41         -<DL>
    42         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    43         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autofocus">-autofocus</A></TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
    47         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
    48         -</TR>
    49         -<TR>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
    51         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
    52         -</TR>
    53         -<TR>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
    55         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
    56         -</TR>
    57         -<TR>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
    59         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
    60         -</TR>
    61         -<TR>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
    63         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
    64         -</TR>
    65         -<TR>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
    67         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
    68         -</TR>
    69         -<TR>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
    71         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-multicolumn">-multicolumn</A></TD>
    72         -</TR>
    73         -<TR>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
    75         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
    76         -</TR>
    77         -<TR>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
    79         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectmode">-selectmode</A></TD>
    80         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
    81         -</TABLE></DD>
    82         -</DL>
    83         -<DL>
    84         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    85         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
    86         - <I>event</I>
    87         - <I>script</I>
    88         -</DD>
    89         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
    90         - <I>event</I>
    91         - <I>script</I>
    92         -</DD>
    93         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    94         - <I>option</I>
    95         -</DD>
    96         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    97         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    98         -</DD>
    99         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
   100         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   101         -</DD>
   102         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
   103         - <I>item</I>
   104         - <I>text</I>
   105         - ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
   106         - ?<I>clickres</I>?
   107         - ?<I>select</I>?
   108         -</DD>
   109         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
   110         - <I>item</I>
   111         -</DD>
   112         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
   113         - <I>item</I>
   114         -</DD>
   115         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
   116         - <I>index</I>
   117         - <I>item</I>
   118         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   119         -</DD>
   120         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#item"><B>item</B></A>
   121         - <I>first</I>
   122         - ?<I>last</I>?
   123         -</DD>
   124         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
   125         - <I>item</I>
   126         - <I>option</I>
   127         -</DD>
   128         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   129         - <I>item</I>
   130         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   131         -</DD>
   132         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#items"><B>items</B></A>
   133         - ?<I>first</I>?
   134         - ?<I>last</I>?
   135         -</DD>
   136         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
   137         - <I>item</I>
   138         - <I>index</I>
   139         -</DD>
   140         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
   141         - <I>neworder</I>
   142         -</DD>
   143         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
   144         - <I>item</I>
   145         -</DD>
   146         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
   147         - <I>cmd</I>
   148         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   149         -</DD>
   150         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
   151         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   152         -</DD>
   153         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
   154         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   155         -</DD>
   156         -</DL>
   157         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   158         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   159         -<P>
   160         -
   161         -<B>ListBox</B> widget uses canvas to display a list of items.
   162         -Each item is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
   163         -image or window. Each item is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
   164         -<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
   165         -A item is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
   166         -<B>insert</B> command). The ListBox can have one or more columns, depending on
   167         -<B>multicolumn</B> option. The user do not handle columns; the number of columns
   168         -is determined following the height of the ListBox in order to see each item vertically.
   169         -
   170         -</P>
   171         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   172         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   173         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-autofocus"><B>-autofocus (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   174         -<DD>
   175         -    If this option is true, the listbox will take focus any time the user
   176         -    clicks in it.  Without focus, the listbox's mouse wheel bindings will
   177         -    not work properly.  The default is true.
   178         -</DD>
   179         -</DL>
   180         -
   181         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
   182         -<DD>
   183         -
   184         -Specifies horizontal pad between each columns.
   185         -
   186         -</DD>
   187         -</DL>
   188         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
   189         -<DD>
   190         -
   191         -Specifies vertical size of the items.
   192         -
   193         -</DD>
   194         -</DL>
   195         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
   196         -<DD>
   197         -A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
   198         -</DD>
   199         -</DL>
   200         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
   201         -<DD>
   202         -
   203         -Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
   204         -<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   205         -option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   206         -
   207         -</DD>
   208         -</DL>
   209         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
   210         -<DD>
   211         -
   212         -Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
   213         -Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
   214         -
   215         -</DD>
   216         -</DL>
   217         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
   218         -<DD>
   219         -
   220         -ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
   221         -if no item is designated. In other cases:
   222         -<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
   223         -<UL>
   224         -<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> if empty as the data type, 
   225         -<LI><I>{move copy link}</I> as the operations, 
   226         -<LI>the item identifier as the data.
   227         -</UL>
   228         -If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   229         -<UL>
   230         -<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
   231         -<LI>the identifier of the dragged item,
   232         -<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
   233         -</UL>
   234         -and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
   235         -<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   236         -
   237         -</DD>
   238         -</DL>
   239         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
   240         -<DD>
   241         -
   242         -Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
   243         -
   244         -</DD>
   245         -</DL>
   246         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
   247         -<DD>
   248         -
   249         -ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
   250         -and extract item and position.
   251         -<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   252         -<UL>
   253         -<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
   254         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   255         -<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
   256         -<UL>
   257         -<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
   258         -<LI><I>{</I><B>item</B> <I>item}</I> or
   259         -<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>index}</I>.
   260         -</UL>
   261         -<LI>the current operation,
   262         -<LI>the data type,
   263         -<LI>the data.
   264         -</UL>
   265         -
   266         -<p>
   267         -The default drop command allows for drag-and-drop within the listbox but
   268         -not to or from other widgets.
   269         -</p>
   270         -
   271         -</DD>
   272         -</DL>
   273         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
   274         -<DD>
   275         -A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
   276         -</DD>
   277         -</DL>
   278         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
   279         -<DD>
   280         -
   281         -LsitBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
   282         -and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
   283         -If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
   284         -<UL>
   285         -<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
   286         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   287         -<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
   288         -<UL>
   289         -<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
   290         -<LI>the targeted item if drag icon points an item and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains
   291         -<I>i</I>, else empty string.
   292         -<LI>an index within two items where drag icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option
   293         -contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
   294         -<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside an item and between two
   295         -items. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>item</I>.
   296         -</UL>
   297         -<LI>the current operation,
   298         -<LI>the data type,
   299         -<LI>the data.
   300         -</UL>
   301         -The command must return a list with two elements:
   302         -<UL>
   303         -<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
   304         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
   305         -<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>item</I> or <I>position</I>.
   306         -</UL>
   307         -
   308         -</DD>
   309         -</DL>
   310         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
   311         -<DD>
   312         -
   313         -Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
   314         -<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
   315         -<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two items,
   316         -and <B>i</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside items.
   317         -
   318         -</DD>
   319         -</DL>
   320         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
   321         -<DD>
   322         -
   323         -Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
   324         -See option <B>droptypes</B> of
   325         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   326         -for more infromation.
   327         -
   328         -<BR>Default is <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
   329         -
   330         -</DD>
   331         -</DL>
   332         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   333         -<DD>
   334         -
   335         -Specifies the desired height for the listbox in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
   336         -
   337         -</DD>
   338         -</DL>
   339         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-multicolumn"><B>-multicolumn</B></A></DT>
   340         -<DD>
   341         -
   342         -Specifies wether or not ListBox layouts items in order to see each one vertically.
   343         -
   344         -</DD>
   345         -</DL>
   346         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
   347         -<DD>
   348         -
   349         -Specifies distance between image or window and text of the items.
   350         -
   351         -</DD>
   352         -</DL>
   353         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
   354         -<DD>
   355         -
   356         -Specifies wether or not the listbox should be redrawn when entering idle.
   357         -Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the listbox.
   358         -
   359         -</DD>
   360         -</DL>
   361         -
   362         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   363         -<DD>
   364         -    If true, the listbox will draw a selection rectangle that fills the
   365         -    listbox from left-to-right instead of just drawing a box around the
   366         -    selected item.  This more closely mimics the standard Tk listbox.
   367         -</DD>
   368         -</DL>
   369         -
   370         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectmode"><B>-selectmode</B></A></DT>
   371         -<DD>
   372         -
   373         -Specifies the desired selection-mode for the listbox. Must be one of
   374         -<B>none</B>, <B>single</B> or <B>multiple</B>. <B>selectmode</B> <I>single</I>
   375         -allows to select 1 item by its text or image. <B>selectmode</B> <I>multiple</I>
   376         -allows to select multiple items by their text or image. For more info on
   377         -selectmodes <I>single</I> or <I>multiple</I>, see the Tk <B>listbox</B>
   378         -command. Default value for <B>selectmode</B> is <I>none</I>.
   379         -
   380         -</DD>
   381         -</DL>
   382         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   383         -<DD>
   384         -
   385         -Specifies the desired width for the listbox in units of 8 pixels.
   386         -
   387         -</DD>
   388         -</DL>
   389         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   390         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   391         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
   392         - <I>event</I>
   393         - <I>script</I>
   394         -</DT><DD>
   395         -
   396         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   397         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a item.
   398         -The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
   399         -
   400         -<p>
   401         -Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
   402         -path of the listbox.
   403         -</p>
   404         -
   405         -</DD></DL>
   406         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
   407         - <I>event</I>
   408         - <I>script</I>
   409         -</DT><DD>
   410         -
   411         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   412         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a item.
   413         -The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.
   414         -
   415         -<p>
   416         -Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
   417         -path of the listbox.
   418         -</p>
   419         -
   420         -</DD></DL>
   421         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   422         - <I>option</I>
   423         -</DT><DD>
   424         -
   425         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   426         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   427         -</DD></DL>
   428         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   429         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   430         -</DT><DD>
   431         -
   432         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   433         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   434         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   435         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   436         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   437         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   438         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   439         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   440         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   441         -
   442         -</DD></DL>
   443         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   444         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   445         -</DT><DD>
   446         -
   447         -Deletes all items in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
   448         -of items or a list of list of items.
   449         -To delete all items, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName items]</I>.
   450         -
   451         -</DD></DL>
   452         -<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
   453         - <I>item</I>
   454         - <I>text</I>
   455         - ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
   456         - ?<I>clickres</I>?
   457         - ?<I>select</I>?
   458         -</DT><DD>
   459         -
   460         -Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of an item.
   461         -<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
   462         -edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
   463         -if edition is accepted.
   464         -<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
   465         -<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
   466         -If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
   467         -If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
   468         -In all other case, the edition continues.
   469         -<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
   470         -the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
   471         -and continue edition.
   472         -<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
   473         -
   474         -</DD></DL>
   475         -<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
   476         - <I>item</I>
   477         -</DT><DD>
   478         -
   479         -Returns 1 if <I>item</I> exists in the listbox, else 0.
   480         -
   481         -</DD></DL>
   482         -<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
   483         - <I>item</I>
   484         -</DT><DD>
   485         -
   486         -Returns the position of <I>item</I> in the list.
   487         -
   488         -</DD></DL>
   489         -<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
   490         - <I>index</I>
   491         - <I>item</I>
   492         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   493         -</DT><DD>
   494         -
   495         -<p>
   496         -Inserts a new item identified by <I>item</I> in the list at position <I>index</I>.
   497         -</p>
   498         -
   499         -<p>
   500         -Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the item name will be replaced by the
   501         -number of the item in the order of insertion.
   502         -</p>
   503         -
   504         -<P>
   505         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
   506         -<DD>
   507         -
   508         -User data associated to the item.
   509         -
   510         -</DD>
   511         -</DL>
   512         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
   513         -<DD>
   514         -
   515         -Specifies the foreground color of the label of the item.
   516         -
   517         -</DD>
   518         -</DL>
   519         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
   520         -<DD>
   521         -
   522         -Specifies a font for the label of the item.
   523         -
   524         -</DD>
   525         -</DL>
   526         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
   527         -<DD>
   528         -
   529         -Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the item.
   530         -<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
   531         -</DD>
   532         -</DL>
   533         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-indent"><B>-indent</B></A></DT>
   534         -<DD>
   535         -
   536         -Specifies the amount of extra space in pixels at the left of the item.
   537         -
   538         -</DD>
   539         -</DL>
   540         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
   541         -<DD>
   542         -
   543         -Specifies the label of the item.
   544         -
   545         -</DD>
   546         -</DL>
   547         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
   548         -<DD>
   549         -
   550         -Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the item.
   551         -<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
   552         -</DD>
   553         -</DL>
   554         -</DD></DL>
   555         -<DL><DT><A NAME="item"><I>pathName</I> <B>item</B></A>
   556         - <I>first</I>
   557         - ?<I>last</I>?
   558         -</DT><DD>
   559         -
   560         -<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>items</I> instead.</B><BR>
   561         -If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the item at index <I>first</I> in the list, 
   562         -or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
   563         -If <I>last</I> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all
   564         -of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, inclusive. 
   565         -Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard forms for indices.
   566         -
   567         -</DD></DL>
   568         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
   569         - <I>item</I>
   570         - <I>option</I>
   571         -</DT><DD>
   572         -
   573         -Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
   574         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
   575         -
   576         -</DD></DL>
   577         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   578         - <I>item</I>
   579         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   580         -</DT><DD>
   581         -
   582         -This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
   583         -options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
   584         -the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
   585         -item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
   586         -in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
   587         -returns a list describing the current options for the item.
   588         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   589         -
   590         -</DD></DL>
   591         -<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
   592         - ?<I>first</I>?
   593         - ?<I>last</I>?
   594         -</DT><DD>
   595         -
   596         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all items.
   597         -If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the item at index
   598         -<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
   599         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
   600         -are all of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   601         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   602         -forms for indices.
   603         -
   604         -</DD></DL>
   605         -<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
   606         - <I>item</I>
   607         - <I>index</I>
   608         -</DT><DD>
   609         -
   610         -Moves <I>item</I> at position <I>index</I> in the list.
   611         -
   612         -</DD></DL>
   613         -<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
   614         - <I>neworder</I>
   615         -</DT><DD>
   616         -
   617         -Modifies the order of items in the listbox given by <I>neworder</I>. Items that do not
   618         -appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
   619         -
   620         -</DD></DL>
   621         -<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
   622         - <I>item</I>
   623         -</DT><DD>
   624         -
   625         -Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>item</I> visible.
   626         -
   627         -</DD></DL>
   628         -<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
   629         - <I>cmd</I>
   630         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   631         -</DT><DD>
   632         -
   633         -Modifies the list of selected items following <I>cmd</I>:
   634         -<DL>
   635         -<DT><B>clear</B>
   636         -<DD>remove all items of the selection.
   637         -<DT><B>set</B>
   638         -<DD>set the selection to all items in <I>arg</I>
   639         -<DT><B>add</B>
   640         -<DD>add all items of <I>arg</I> in the selection
   641         -<DT><B>remove</B>
   642         -<DD>remove all items of <I>arg</I> of the selection
   643         -<DT><B>get</B>
   644         -<DD>return the current selected items
   645         -</DL>
   646         -
   647         -</DD></DL>
   648         -<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
   649         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   650         -</DT><DD>
   651         -
   652         -Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   653         -
   654         -</DD></DL>
   655         -<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
   656         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   657         -</DT><DD>
   658         -
   659         -Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   660         -
   661         -</DD></DL>
   662         -
   663         -
   664         -<b>BINDINGS</b>
   665         -
   666         -<p>
   667         -A <b>&lt;&lt;ListboxSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
   668         -selection in the listbox changes.
   669         -</p>
   670         -
   671         -<p>
   672         -The listbox has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
   673         -</p>
   674         -</p>
   675         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MainFrame.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>MainFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>MainFrame</B>
     6         - - Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar 
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MainFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressmax (see <B>-maximum</B>)</TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progresstype (see <B>-type</B>)</TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressvar (see <B>-variable</B>)</TD>
    25         -</TR>
    26         -</TABLE></DD>
    27         -</DL>
    28         -<DL>
    29         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    30         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    31         -<TR>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD></TR>
    33         -<TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-menu">-menu</A></TD>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TD></TR>
    38         -<TR>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
    40         -</TR>
    41         -<TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD></TR>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sizegrip">-sizegrip</A></TR>
    44         -</TABLE></DD>
    45         -</DL>
    46         -<DL>
    47         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    48         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addindicator"><B>addindicator</B></A>
    49         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    50         -</DD>
    51         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addtoolbar"><B>addtoolbar</B></A>
    52         -</DD>
    53         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    54         - <I>option</I>
    55         -</DD>
    56         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    57         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    58         -</DD>
    59         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    60         -</DD>
    61         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getindicator"><B>getindicator</B></A>
    62         - <I>index</I>
    63         -</DD>
    64         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getmenu"><B>getmenu</B></A>
    65         - <I>menuid</I>
    66         -</DD>
    67         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#gettoolbar"><B>gettoolbar</B></A>
    68         - <I>index</I>
    69         -</DD>
    70         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setmenustate"><B>setmenustate</B></A>
    71         - <I>tag</I>
    72         - <I>state</I>
    73         -</DD>
    74         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showstatusbar"><B>showstatusbar</B></A>
    75         - <I>name</I>
    76         -</DD>
    77         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showtoolbar"><B>showtoolbar</B></A>
    78         - <I>index</I>
    79         - <I>bool</I>
    80         -</DD>
    81         -</DL>
    82         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    83         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    84         -<P>
    85         -
    86         -MainFrame manage toplevel to have:<BR>
    87         -<UL>
    88         -<LI>simple menu creation, with automatic accelerator bindings and
    89         -<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> association,</LI>
    90         -<LI>one or more toolbars that user can hide,</LI>
    91         -<LI>a status bar, displaying a user message or a menu description, and optionally a
    92         -<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.</LI>
    93         -</UL>
    94         -</P>
    95         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    96         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    97         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    98         -<DD>
    99         -
   100         -Specifies the desired height for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
   101         -Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
   102         -will not request any size at all.
   103         -</DD>
   104         -</DL>
   105         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-menu"><B>-menu (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   106         -<DD>
   107         -
   108         -This option describes the menu. This is a list whose each five elements describe
   109         -one cascade menu. It has the following form:
   110         -{<I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>...}
   111         -where <I>menuentries</I> is a list where each element describe one menu entry, which can be:
   112         -<UL>
   113         -<LI>for a separator:<BR>
   114         -  {<B>separator</B>}</LI>
   115         -<LI>for a command:<BR>
   116         -  {<B>command</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
   117         -<LI>for a check button:<BR>
   118         -  {<B>checkbutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
   119         -<LI>for a radio button:<BR>
   120         -  {<B>radiobutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
   121         -<LI>for a cascade menu:<BR>
   122         -  {<B>cascade</B> <I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>}</LI>
   123         -</UL>
   124         -where:
   125         -<UL>
   126         -<LI><I>menuname</I> is the name of the menu. If it contains a &amp;, the following character
   127         -is automatically converted to the corresponding <B>-underline</B> option of <B>menu add</B>
   128         -command.</LI>
   129         -<LI><I>tags</I> is the tags list for the entry, used for enabling or disabling menu
   130         -entries with <B>MainFrame::setmenustate</B>.</LI>
   131         -<LI><I>menuId</I> is an id for the menu, from which you can get menu pathname with
   132         - <B>MainFrame::getmenu</B>.</LI>
   133         -<LI><I>tearoff</I> specifies if menu has tearoff entry.</LI>
   134         -<LI><I>description</I> specifies a string for <A HREF=\"DynamicHelp.html\">DynamicHelp</A>.</LI>
   135         -<LI><I>accelerator</I> specifies a key sequence. It is a list of two elements, where the first
   136         -is one of <B>Shift</B>, <B>Ctrl</B>, <B>Alt</B>, <B>CtrlAlt</B>, <B>Cmd</B>,  or <B>ShiftCmd</B>, and the second as letter
   137         -(see <A HREF="#-casesensitive">-casesensitive</A> option for interpretation),  digit or
   138         -a special key name.
   139         -An accelerator string is build and corresponding binding set on the toplevel to invoke the
   140         -menu entry.</LI>
   141         -<LI><I>option value</I> specifies additionnal options for the entry (see <B>menu add</B>
   142         -command).</LI>
   143         -</UL>
   144         -Each value enclosed by ? are optional and defaulted to empty string, but must be
   145         -provided if one or more following options is not empty.
   146         -<BR>Example:
   147         -<PRE>
   148         -set descmenu {
   149         -    "&File" {} {} 0 {
   150         -        {command "&New"     {} "Create a new document"     {Ctrl n} -command Menu::new}
   151         -        {command "&Open..." {} "Open an existing document" {Ctrl o} -command Menu::open}
   152         -        {command "&Save"    open "Save the document" {Ctrl s} -command Menu::save}
   153         -        {cascade  "&Export"  {} export 0 {
   154         -            {command "Format &1" open "Export document to format 1" {} -command {Menu::export 1}}
   155         -            {command "Format &2" open "Export document to format 2" {} -command {Menu::export 2}}
   156         -        }}
   157         -        {separator}
   158         -        {cascade "&Recent files" {} recent 0 {}}
   159         -        {separator}
   160         -        {command "E&xit" {} "Exit the application" {} -command Menu::exit}
   161         -    }
   162         -    "&Options" {} {} 0 {
   163         -        {checkbutton "Toolbar" {} "Show/hide toolbar" {}
   164         -            -variable Menu::_drawtoolbar
   165         -            -command  {$Menu::_mainframe showtoolbar toolbar $Menu::_drawtoolbar}
   166         -        }
   167         -    }
   168         -}
   169         -</PRE>
   170         -
   171         -</DD>
   172         -</DL>
   173         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   174         -<DD>
   175         -
   176         -Specifies if separator should be drawn at the top and/or at the bottom of the user window.
   177         -Must be one of the values <B>none</B>, <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>both</B>.
   178         -It depends on the relief of subwidgets of user window.
   179         -</DD>
   180         -</DL>
   181         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-textvariable"><B>-textvariable</B></A></DT>
   182         -<DD>
   183         -
   184         -Specifies the textvariable option for the label of the status bar.
   185         -<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> description
   186         -of menu entries are mapped to this variable at the creation of the MainFrame.
   187         -If this variable is changed by MainFrame::configure, menu description will
   188         -not be available.
   189         -<BR>You change the text of the label by modifying the value of the variable.
   190         -</DD>
   191         -</DL>
   192         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   193         -<DD>
   194         -
   195         -Specifies the desired width for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
   196         -Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
   197         -will not request any size at all.
   198         -</DD>
   199         -</DL>
   200         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-sizegrip"><B>-sizegrip (themed, read-only)</B></A></DT>
   201         -<DD>
   202         -
   203         -If bool argument is true and themed mode, show a ttk sizegrip widget in the lower-right corner.
   204         -</DD>
   205         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   206         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   207         -<DL><DT><A NAME="addindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>addindicator</B></A>
   208         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   209         -</DT><DD>
   210         -
   211         -Add an indicator box at the right of the status bar. Each indicator are added from left
   212         -to right. An indicator is a Tk label widget configured with option-value pair
   213         -given by ?<I>arg...</I>?. <B>-relief</B> and <B>-borderwidth</B> options are respetively
   214         -defaulted to <I>sunken</I> and 1. Returns the pathname of the created label.
   215         -</DD></DL>
   216         -<DL><DT><A NAME="addtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>addtoolbar</B></A>
   217         -</DT><DD>
   218         -
   219         -Add a toolbar to the MainFrame. Returns the pathname of the new window where to place
   220         -toolbar items.
   221         -</DD></DL>
   222         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   223         - <I>option</I>
   224         -</DT><DD>
   225         -
   226         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   227         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   228         -</DD></DL>
   229         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   230         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   231         -</DT><DD>
   232         -
   233         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   234         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   235         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   236         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   237         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   238         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   239         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   240         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   241         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   242         -
   243         -</DD></DL>
   244         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   245         -</DT><DD>
   246         -
   247         -Returns the pathname of the user window.
   248         -</DD></DL>
   249         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>getindicator</B></A>
   250         - <I>index</I>
   251         -</DT><DD>
   252         -
   253         -Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added indicator.
   254         -</DD></DL>
   255         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenu"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenu</B></A>
   256         - <I>menuid</I>
   257         -</DT><DD>
   258         -
   259         -Returns the pathname of the menu whose id is <I>menuid</I>.
   260         -</DD></DL>
   261         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenustate</B></A>
   262         - <I>tag</I>
   263         - <I>state</I>
   264         -</DT><DD>
   265         -
   266         -Returns the state of the given menu <I>tag</I>.
   267         -</DD></DL>
   268         -<DL><DT><A NAME="gettoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>gettoolbar</B></A>
   269         - <I>index</I>
   270         -</DT><DD>
   271         -
   272         -Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
   273         -</DD></DL>
   274         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>setmenustate</B></A>
   275         - <I>tag</I>
   276         - <I>state</I>
   277         -</DT><DD>
   278         -
   279         -Set the <B>-state</B> option value of all the menu entries that have the tag <I>tag</I>
   280         -to <I>state</I>.
   281         -A menu entry is disabled, if one of its associated tags have state <B>disabled</B>.
   282         -
   283         -</DD></DL>
   284         -<DL><DT><A NAME="showstatusbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showstatusbar</B></A>
   285         - <I>name</I>
   286         -</DT><DD>
   287         -
   288         -<I>name</I> is one of <B>none</B>, <B>status</B> or <B>progression</B>.
   289         -Use <B>none</B> to hide the status bar, <B>status</B> to display the label only, or
   290         -<B>progression</B> to display the label and the
   291         -<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.
   292         -</DD></DL>
   293         -<DL><DT><A NAME="showtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showtoolbar</B></A>
   294         - <I>index</I>
   295         - <I>bool</I>
   296         -</DT><DD>
   297         -
   298         -Hide if <I>bool</I> is 0, or show if <I>bool</I> is 1 the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
   299         -To prevent your toplevel from resizing while hiding/showing toolbar,
   300         -do [wm geometry $top [wm geometry $top]] when it is managed.
   301         -</DD></DL>
   302         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/MessageDlg.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>MessageDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>MessageDlg</B>
     6         - - Message dialog box
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MessageDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
    25         -</TABLE></DD>
    26         -</DL>
    27         -<DL>
    28         -<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
    29         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    30         -<TR>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-cancel</TD>
    33         -</TR>
    34         -<TR>
    35         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-default</TD>
    36         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
    37         -</TR>
    38         -</TABLE></DD>
    39         -</DL>
    40         -<DL>
    41         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    42         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    43         -<TR>
    44         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-aspect">-aspect</A></TD>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttons">-buttons</A></TD>
    46         -</TR>
    47         -<TR>
    48         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttonwidth">-buttonwidth</A></TD>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-icon">-icon</A></TD>
    50         -</TR>
    51         -<TR>
    52         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-justify">-justify</A></TD>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-message">-message</A></TD>
    54         -</TR>
    55         -<TR>
    56         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TD>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TD>
    58         -<TR>
    59         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
    60         -</TR>
    61         -</TR>
    62         -</TABLE></DD>
    63         -</DL>
    64         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    65         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    66         -<P>
    67         -
    68         -MessageDlg provides a simple way to display a message dialog.
    69         -MessageDlg::<B>create</B> creates the message dialog, displays
    70         -it and return the index of the pressed button, or -1 if it is destroyed.
    71         -When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
    72         -
    73         -</P>
    74         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    75         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    76         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-aspect"><B>-aspect</B></A></DT>
    77         -<DD>
    78         -
    79         -Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
    80         -aspect ratio for the text.  The aspect ratio is specified as
    81         -100*width/height.  100 means the text should
    82         -be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
    83         -be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
    84         -be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
    85         -Used to choose line length for text if <B>width</B> option
    86         -isn't specified.
    87         -Defaults to 150.
    88         -
    89         -</DD>
    90         -</DL>
    91         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttons"><B>-buttons</B></A></DT>
    92         -<DD>
    93         -
    94         -Specifies a list of buttons to display when <B>type</B> option is <I>user</I>.
    95         -If a button has a symbolic name, its associated text will be displayed.
    96         -
    97         -</DD>
    98         -</DL>
    99         -
   100         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttonwidth"><B>-buttonwidth</B></A></DT>
   101         -<DD>
   102         -    Specifies the standard width of the buttons in the dialog.
   103         -</DD>
   104         -</DL>
   105         -
   106         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-icon"><B>-icon</B></A></DT>
   107         -<DD>
   108         -
   109         -Specifies an icon to display. Must be one of the following: <B>error</B>, <B>info</B>,
   110         -<B>question</B> or <B>warning</B>.
   111         -
   112         -</DD>
   113         -</DL>
   114         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-justify"><B>-justify</B></A></DT>
   115         -<DD>
   116         -
   117         -Specifies how to justify lines of text.
   118         -Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>.  Defaults
   119         -to <B>left</B>.
   120         -This option works together with the <B>anchor</B>, <B>aspect</B>,
   121         -<B>padx</B>, <B>pady</B>, and <B>width</B> options to provide a variety
   122         -of arrangements of the text within the window.
   123         -The <B>aspect</B> and <B>width</B> options determine the amount of
   124         -screen space needed to display the text.
   125         -The <B>anchor</B>, <B>padx</B>, and <B>pady</B> options determine where this
   126         -rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
   127         -<B>justify</B> option determines how each line is displayed within that
   128         -rectangular region.
   129         -For example, suppose <B>anchor</B> is <B>e</B> and <B>justify</B> is
   130         -<B>left</B>, and that the message window is much larger than needed
   131         -for the text.
   132         -The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
   133         -line up and the right edge of the longest line is <B>padx</B> from
   134         -the right side of the window;  the entire text block will be centered
   135         -in the vertical span of the window.
   136         -
   137         -</DD>
   138         -</DL>
   139         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-message"><B>-message</B></A></DT>
   140         -<DD>
   141         -
   142         -Specifies the message to display in this message box.
   143         -
   144         -</DD>
   145         -</DL>
   146         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
   147         -<DD>
   148         -
   149         -Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box.
   150         -If the value is empty (the default), a default title will be set corresponding
   151         -to the <B>icon</B> option.
   152         -The default associated title is in english, and can be modified to set it in
   153         -another language by specifying the resource:
   154         -<PRE>    *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title:   <I>value</I></PRE>
   155         -or the equivalent tcl command:
   156         -<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title <I>value</I></PRE>
   157         -where <I>name</I> is the name of an icon as defined in the <B>icon</B> option.
   158         -<BR>For example, for french language, you can specify for a warning dialog:
   159         -<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.warningTitle  "Attention"</PRE>
   160         -
   161         -</DD>
   162         -</DL>
   163         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
   164         -<DD>
   165         -
   166         -Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
   167         -<DD>
   168         -<P>
   169         -<DL COMPACT>
   170         -<DT>
   171         -<B>abortretryignore</B>
   172         -<DD>
   173         -Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>abort</B>,
   174         -<B>retry</B> and <B>ignore</B>.<P>
   175         -<DT>
   176         -<B>ok</B>
   177         -<DD>
   178         -Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
   179         -<DT>
   180         -<B>okcancel</B>
   181         -<DD>
   182         -Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
   183         -<DT>
   184         -<B>retrycancel</B>
   185         -<DD>
   186         -Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>retry</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
   187         -<DT>
   188         -<B>yesno</B>
   189         -<DD>
   190         -Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B> and <B>no</B>.<P>
   191         -<DT>
   192         -<B>yesnocancel</B>
   193         -<DD>
   194         -Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B>, <B>no</B>
   195         -and <B>cancel</B>.
   196         -<P>
   197         -<DT>
   198         -<B>user</B>
   199         -<DD>
   200         -Displays buttons of <B>-buttons</B> option.<P>
   201         -<DT>
   202         -</DL COMPACT>
   203         -
   204         -</DD>
   205         -</DL>
   206         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   207         -<DD>
   208         -
   209         -Specifies the length of lines in the window.
   210         -If this option has a value greater than zero then the <B>aspect</B>
   211         -option is ignored and the <B>width</B> option determines the line
   212         -length.
   213         -If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
   214         -the <B>aspect</B> option determines the line length.
   215         -
   216         -</DD>
   217         -</DL>
   218         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/NoteBook.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>NoteBook</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>NoteBook</B>
     6         - - Notebook manager widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>NoteBook</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    17         -</TABLE></DD>
    18         -</DL>
    19         -<DL>
    20         -<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
    21         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    22         -<TR>
    23         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activebackground</TD>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activeforeground</TD>
    25         -</TR>
    26         -<TR>
    27         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
    29         -</TR>
    30         -<TR>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    33         -</TR>
    34         -<TR>
    35         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
    36         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
    37         -</TR>
    38         -</TABLE></DD>
    39         -</DL>
    40         -<DL>
    41         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    42         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    43         -<TR>
    44         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arcradius">-arcradius</A></TD>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
    46         -</TR>
    47         -<TR>
    48         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
    50         -</TR>
    51         -<TR>
    52         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabbevelsize">-tabbevelsize</A></TD>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabpady">-tabpady</A></TD>
    54         -</TR>
    55         -<TR>
    56         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
    57         -</TR>
    58         -</TABLE></DD>
    59         -</DL>
    60         -<DL>
    61         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    62         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindtabs"><B>bindtabs</B></A>
    63         - <I>event</I>
    64         - <I>script</I>
    65         -</DD>
    66         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    67         - <I>option</I>
    68         -</DD>
    69         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
    70         -</DD>
    71         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    72         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    73         -</DD>
    74         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
    75         - <I>page</I>
    76         - ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
    77         -</DD>
    78         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    79         - <I>page</I>
    80         -</DD>
    81         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
    82         - <I>page</I>
    83         -</DD>
    84         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
    85         - <I>index</I>
    86         - <I>page</I>
    87         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    88         -</DD>
    89         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
    90         - <I>page</I>
    91         - <I>option</I>
    92         -</DD>
    93         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
    94         - <I>page</I>
    95         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    96         -</DD>
    97         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
    98         - <I>page</I>
    99         - <I>index</I>
   100         -</DD>
   101         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
   102         - <I>first</I>
   103         - ?<I>last</I>?
   104         -</DD>
   105         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
   106         - ?<I>first</I>?
   107         - ?<I>last</I>?
   108         -</DD>
   109         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
   110         - ?<I>page</I>?
   111         -</DD>
   112         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
   113         - <I>page</I>
   114         -</DD>
   115         -</DL>
   116         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   117         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   118         -<P>
   119         -
   120         -NoteBook widget manage a set of pages and displays one of them.
   121         -
   122         -</P>
   123         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   124         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   125         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-arcradius"><B>-arcradius</B></A></DT>
   126         -<DD>
   127         -
   128         -Specifies the amount of rounding effect at the corners of a tab. This value
   129         -can be adjusted from 0 to 8 pixels with the default being 2 pixels. Usually,
   130         -small values are preferable.
   131         -</DD>
   132         -</DL>
   133         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   134         -<DD>
   135         -
   136         -Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
   137         -then the window will not request any size at all.
   138         -In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
   139         -enough to contains the largest page.
   140         -</DD>
   141         -</DL>
   142         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous</B></A></DT>
   143         -<DD>
   144         -
   145         -Specifies wether or not the label of the pages must have the same width.
   146         -
   147         -</DD>
   148         -</DL>
   149         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
   150         -<DD>
   151         -
   152         -Specifies the side where to place the label of the pages. Must be one
   153         -of <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
   154         -
   155         -</DD>
   156         -</DL>
   157         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabbevelsize"><B>-tabbevelsize</B></A></DT>
   158         -<DD>
   159         -
   160         -Specifies the amount of bevel the tabs should have. This value can be adjusted from
   161         -0 to 8 pixels with the default being 0 pixels. A zero pixel bevel is essentially rectangular
   162         -while non-zero bevel size will look trapezoidal.
   163         -</DD>
   164         -</DL>
   165         -
   166         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabpady"><B>-tabpady</B></A></DT>
   167         -<DD>
   168         -    Specifies the padding between the text in the tab and the top and bottom
   169         -    of the tab.  Padding may be a list of two values to specify padding for
   170         -    top and bottom separately.  Padding defaults to {0 6}.
   171         -</DD>
   172         -</DL>
   173         -
   174         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   175         -<DD>
   176         -
   177         -Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
   178         -then the window will not request any size at all.
   179         -In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
   180         -enough to contains the largest page.
   181         -</DD>
   182         -</DL>
   183         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   184         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   185         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindtabs"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindtabs</B></A>
   186         - <I>event</I>
   187         - <I>script</I>
   188         -</DT><DD>
   189         -
   190         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   191         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on a tab. The page identifier on which
   192         -the event occurs is appended to the command.
   193         -
   194         -</DD></DL>
   195         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   196         - <I>option</I>
   197         -</DT><DD>
   198         -
   199         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   200         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   201         -</DD></DL>
   202         -<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
   203         -</DT><DD>
   204         -
   205         -This command can be called to make the NoteBook large enough to contain the largest page.
   206         -Note that if all pages use -createcmd, they will have no requested size.
   207         -
   208         -</DD></DL>
   209         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   210         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   211         -</DT><DD>
   212         -
   213         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   214         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   215         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   216         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   217         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   218         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   219         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   220         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   221         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   222         -
   223         -</DD></DL>
   224         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   225         - <I>page</I>
   226         - ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
   227         -</DT><DD>
   228         -
   229         -Deletes the page <I>page</I>. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 1 (the default), the frame
   230         -associated to <I>page</I> is destroyed. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 0, the frame is not
   231         -destroyed and is reused by further call to <B>insert</B> with the same <I>page</I>.
   232         -
   233         -</DD></DL>
   234         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   235         - <I>page</I>
   236         -</DT><DD>
   237         -
   238         -Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
   239         -
   240         -</DD></DL>
   241         -<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
   242         - <I>page</I>
   243         -</DT><DD>
   244         -
   245         -Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.
   246         -
   247         -</DD></DL>
   248         -<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
   249         - <I>index</I>
   250         - <I>page</I>
   251         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   252         -</DT><DD>
   253         -
   254         -Insert a new page idendified by <I>page</I> at position <I>index</I> in the pages list.
   255         -<I>index</I> must be numeric or <B>end</B>. The pathname of the new page is returned.
   256         -
   257         -<P>
   258         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-createcmd"><B>-createcmd</B></A></DT>
   259         -<DD>
   260         -
   261         -Specifies a command to be called the first time the page is raised.
   262         -
   263         -</DD>
   264         -</DL>
   265         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
   266         -<DD>
   267         -
   268         -Specifies an image to display for the page at the left of the label
   269         -
   270         -</DD>
   271         -</DL>
   272         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-leavecmd"><B>-leavecmd</B></A></DT>
   273         -<DD>
   274         -
   275         -Specifies a command to be called when a page is about to be leaved.
   276         -The command must return 0 if the page can not be leaved, or 1 if it can.
   277         -
   278         -</DD>
   279         -</DL>
   280         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-raisecmd"><B>-raisecmd</B></A></DT>
   281         -<DD>
   282         -
   283         -Specifies a command to be called each time the page is raised.
   284         -
   285         -</DD>
   286         -</DL>
   287         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
   288         -<DD>
   289         -
   290         -Specifies the state of the page. Must be <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
   291         -
   292         -</DD>
   293         -</DL>
   294         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
   295         -<DD>
   296         -
   297         -Specifies a label to display for the page.
   298         -
   299         -</DD>
   300         -</DL>
   301         -</DD></DL>
   302         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
   303         - <I>page</I>
   304         - <I>option</I>
   305         -</DT><DD>
   306         -
   307         -Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
   308         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
   309         -
   310         -</DD></DL>
   311         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   312         - <I>page</I>
   313         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   314         -</DT><DD>
   315         -
   316         -This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
   317         -options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
   318         -the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
   319         -item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
   320         -in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
   321         -returns a list describing the current options for the item.
   322         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   323         -
   324         -</DD></DL>
   325         -<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
   326         - <I>page</I>
   327         - <I>index</I>
   328         -</DT><DD>
   329         -
   330         -Moves <I>page</I> tab to index <I>index</I>.
   331         -
   332         -</DD></DL>
   333         -<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
   334         - <I>first</I>
   335         - ?<I>last</I>?
   336         -</DT><DD>
   337         -
   338         -<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
   339         -If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
   340         -<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
   341         -returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   342         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   343         -forms for indices.
   344         -
   345         -</DD></DL>
   346         -<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
   347         - ?<I>first</I>?
   348         - ?<I>last</I>?
   349         -</DT><DD>
   350         -
   351         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
   352         -If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
   353         -<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
   354         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
   355         -are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   356         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   357         -forms for indices.
   358         -
   359         -</DD></DL>
   360         -<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
   361         - ?<I>page</I>?
   362         -</DT><DD>
   363         -
   364         -Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
   365         -
   366         -</DD></DL>
   367         -<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
   368         - <I>page</I>
   369         -</DT><DD>
   370         -
   371         -Scrolls labels to make the label of the page <I>page</I> visible.
   372         -
   373         -</DD></DL>
   374         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PagesManager.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>PagesManager</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>PagesManager</B>
     6         - - Pages manager widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PagesManager</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background</A></TR>
    17         -</TABLE></DD>
    18         -</DL>
    19         -<DL>
    20         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    21         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    22         -<TR>
    23         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    25         -</TR>
    26         -</TABLE></DD>
    27         -</DL>
    28         -<DL>
    29         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    30         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
    31         - <I>page</I>
    32         -</DD>
    33         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    34         - <I>option</I>
    35         -</DD>
    36         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
    37         -</DD>
    38         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    39         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    40         -</DD>
    41         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
    42         - <I>page</I>
    43         -</DD>
    44         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    45         - <I>page</I>
    46         -</DD>
    47         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
    48         - <I>first</I>
    49         - ?<I>last</I>?
    50         -</DD>
    51         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
    52         - ?<I>first</I>?
    53         - ?<I>last</I>?
    54         -</DD>
    55         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
    56         - ?<I>page</I>?
    57         -</DD>
    58         -</DL>
    59         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    60         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    61         -<P>
    62         -
    63         -PagesManager widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them.
    64         -PagesManager does not provide any user access method, as NoteBook
    65         -does, so it can be done through a listbox, a menu, radiobutton, or
    66         -whatever.  The widget shows no pages during creation; there must be an
    67         -explicit call to <B>raise</B> to display one.
    68         -
    69         -</P>
    70         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    71         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    72         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    73         -<DD>
    74         -
    75         -Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
    76         -then the window will not request any size at all.
    77         -In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
    78         -larger enough to contains the largest page.
    79         -</DD>
    80         -</DL>
    81         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
    82         -<DD>
    83         -
    84         -Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
    85         -then the window will not request any size at all.
    86         -In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
    87         -larger enough to contains the largest page.
    88         -</DD>
    89         -</DL>
    90         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    91         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    92         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
    93         - <I>page</I>
    94         -</DT><DD>
    95         -
    96         -Add a new page identified by <I>page</I>, which is an arbitrary
    97         -identifier.  The pathname of the new page is returned and widgets for
    98         -the page should be created with this as the parent or ancestor.
    99         -However, PagesManager manages its own geometry. <B>pack</B>,
   100         -<B>grid</B> or an equivalent should not be used with the pathname
   101         -returned by <B>add</B>.
   102         -
   103         -</DD></DL>
   104         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   105         - <I>option</I>
   106         -</DT><DD>
   107         -
   108         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   109         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   110         -</DD></DL>
   111         -<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
   112         -</DT><DD>
   113         -
   114         -This command can be called to make the PagesManager large enough to contain the largest page.
   115         -
   116         -</DD></DL>
   117         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   118         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   119         -</DT><DD>
   120         -
   121         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   122         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   123         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   124         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   125         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   126         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   127         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   128         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   129         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   130         -
   131         -</DD></DL>
   132         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   133         - <I>page</I>
   134         -</DT><DD>
   135         -
   136         -Deletes the page <I>page</I>.
   137         -
   138         -</DD></DL>
   139         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   140         - <I>page</I>
   141         -</DT><DD>
   142         -
   143         -Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.
   144         -
   145         -</DD></DL>
   146         -<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
   147         - <I>first</I>
   148         - ?<I>last</I>?
   149         -</DT><DD>
   150         -
   151         -<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
   152         -If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
   153         -<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
   154         -returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   155         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   156         -forms for indices.
   157         -
   158         -</DD></DL>
   159         -<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
   160         - ?<I>first</I>?
   161         - ?<I>last</I>?
   162         -</DT><DD>
   163         -
   164         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
   165         -If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
   166         -<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
   167         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
   168         -are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   169         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   170         -forms for indices.
   171         -
   172         -</DD></DL>
   173         -<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
   174         - ?<I>page</I>?
   175         -</DT><DD>
   176         -
   177         -Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.
   178         -
   179         -</DD></DL>
   180         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanedWindow.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>PanedWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>PanedWindow</B>
     6         - - Tiled layout manager widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanedWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -</TABLE></DD>
    18         -</DL>
    19         -<DL>
    20         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    21         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    22         -<TR>
    23         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-activator">-activator</A></TD>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TD>
    25         -</TR>
    26         -<TR>
    27         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-weights">-weights</A></TD>
    29         -</TR>
    30         -<TR>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
    32         -</TR>
    33         -</TABLE></DD>
    34         -</DL>
    35         -<DL>
    36         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    37         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
    38         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
    39         -</DD>
    40         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    41         - <I>option</I>
    42         -</DD>
    43         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    44         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    45         -</DD>
    46         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    47         - <I>index</I>
    48         -</DD>
    49         -</DL>
    50         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    51         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    52         -<P>
    53         -
    54         -PanedWindow is a widget that lays out children in
    55         -a vertically or horizontally tiled format.
    56         -The user can adjust the size of the panes, with a pane control sash created
    57         -between children.
    58         -</P>
    59         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    60         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    61         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-activator"><B>-activator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    62         -<DD>
    63         -
    64         -By default, the control sash is either a button or a line depending
    65         -upon the underlying operating system.  This sash may be explicitly set
    66         -using this option.  If set to <B>line</B> then the sash consists of
    67         -just a dividing line.  Otherwise if set to <B>button</B> then it
    68         -constists of a knob that can be dragged.
    69         -
    70         -</DD>
    71         -</DL>
    72         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    73         -<DD>
    74         -
    75         -Specifies additional space between the button of the sash and children.
    76         -
    77         -</DD>
    78         -</DL>
    79         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    80         -<DD>
    81         -
    82         -Specifies the side of the sash, which implies the layout: <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>
    83         -(horizontal layout), <B>left</B> or <B>right</B> (vertical layout).
    84         -</DD>
    85         -</DL>
    86         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-weights"><B>-weights (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    87         -<DD>
    88         -
    89         -Specifies how the weights specified when adding panes should be used. Must be
    90         -<B>extra</B> or <B>available</B>. When using <I>extra</I>, only extra space is
    91         -devided among the diffferent panes relative to their weight. When using
    92         -<I>available</I>, all space is devided among the diffferent panes relative to
    93         -their weight. Default value for <B>weights</B> is <I>extra</I>.
    94         -
    95         -</DD>
    96         -</DL>
    97         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    98         -<DD>
    99         -
   100         -Specifies the width of the button of the sash.  This option is ignored
   101         -if the activator is set to <B>line</B>.
   102         -
   103         -</DD>
   104         -</DL>
   105         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   106         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   107         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
   108         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   109         -</DT><DD>
   110         -
   111         -This command add a new pane. The new pane is placed below the previous pane for
   112         -vertical layout or at right for horizontal layout. This command returns a frame
   113         -where user can place its widget. Valid options are:
   114         -<P>
   115         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-minsize"><B>-minsize</B></A></DT>
   116         -<DD>
   117         -
   118         -Specifies the minimum size requested for the pane.
   119         -See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
   120         -</DD>
   121         -</DL>
   122         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-weight"><B>-weight</B></A></DT>
   123         -<DD>
   124         -
   125         -Specifies the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among panes.
   126         -See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
   127         -</DD>
   128         -</DL>
   129         -</DD></DL>
   130         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   131         - <I>option</I>
   132         -</DT><DD>
   133         -
   134         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   135         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   136         -</DD></DL>
   137         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   138         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   139         -</DT><DD>
   140         -
   141         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   142         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   143         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   144         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   145         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   146         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   147         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   148         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   149         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   150         -
   151         -</DD></DL>
   152         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   153         - <I>index</I>
   154         -</DT><DD>
   155         -
   156         -Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added pane.
   157         -</DD></DL>
   158         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PanelFrame.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>PanelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>PanelFrame</B>
     6         - - Frame with a boxed title area
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -</TABLE></DD>
    28         -</DL>
    29         -<DL>
    30         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    31         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelbackground">-panelbackground</A></TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelforeground">-panelforeground</A></TR>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
    42         -</TR>
    43         -</TABLE></DD>
    44         -</DL>
    45         -<DL>
    46         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    47         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    48         - <I>option</I>
    49         -</DD>
    50         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    51         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    52         -</DD>
    53         -</DL>
    54         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    55         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    56         -
    57         -<P>
    58         -PanelFrame creates a frame area with a boxed title area.  The boxed title
    59         -area contains a label ands allows for other items to be placed in it.  This
    60         -can serve like a mini-toolbar.
    61         -</P>
    62         -
    63         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    64         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    65         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    66         -<DD>
    67         -Specifies the desired height for the widget.
    68         -</DD>
    69         -<DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
    70         -<DD>
    71         -The spacing to place around individual panel area items.
    72         -</DD>
    73         -<DT><A NAME="-panelbackground"><B>-panelbackground</B></A></DT>
    74         -<DD>
    75         -The color for the panel area background.
    76         -Defaults to the selection highlight background color.
    77         -</DD>
    78         -<DT><A NAME="-panelforeground"><B>-panelforeground</B></A></DT>
    79         -<DD>
    80         -The color for the title text.
    81         -Defaults to the selection highlight foreground color.
    82         -</DD>
    83         -<DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
    84         -<DD>
    85         -Specifies the desired width for the widget.
    86         -</DD>
    87         -</DL>
    88         -
    89         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    90         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    91         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
    92         - ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    93         -</DT><DD>
    94         -Add a widget to the panel. Widgets are <B>pack</B>ed in.
    95         -Possible options are:
    96         -<DL>
    97         -<DT><B>-side</B></DT>
    98         -<DD>Side to place item on (defaults to <B>right</B>).</DD>
    99         -<DT><B>-fill</B></DT>
   100         -<DD>Whether to fill space (defaults to <B>none</B>).</DD>
   101         -<DT><B>-expand</B></DT>
   102         -<DD>Whether to expand space (defaults to <B>0</B>).</DD>
   103         -<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
   104         -<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
   105         -</DL>
   106         -</DD>
   107         -</DL>
   108         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   109         - <I>option</I>
   110         -</DT><DD>
   111         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   112         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   113         -</DD>
   114         -</DL>
   115         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   116         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   117         -</DT><DD>
   118         -
   119         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
   120         -<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
   121         -options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
   122         -<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
   123         -<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
   124         -the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
   125         -<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
   126         -given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
   127         -returns an empty string.
   128         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   129         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   130         -</DD>
   131         -</DL>
   132         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   133         -<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
   134         -</DT><DD>
   135         -Delete a widget and associated state from the panel.</DD>
   136         -</DL>
   137         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   138         -</DT><DD>
   139         -Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
   140         -created.</DD>
   141         -</DD>
   142         -</DL>
   143         -<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
   144         -</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
   145         -<DL>
   146         -<DL><DT><A NAME="remove"><I>pathName</I> <B>remove</B></A>
   147         -<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
   148         -</DT><DD>
   149         -Remove a widget item and associated state from the panel without destroying
   150         -the item.</DD>
   151         -</DL>
   152         -
   153         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/PasswdDlg.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>PasswdDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>PasswdDlg</B>
     6         - - Login/Password dialog box
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PasswdDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-modal</TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -<TR>
    28         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
    30         -</TR>
    31         -<TR>
    32         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
    33         -</TABLE></DD>
    34         -</DL>
    35         -<DL>
    36         -<DT><I><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelEntry</B></A></I></DT>
    37         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    38         -<TR>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    40         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
    41         -</TR>
    42         -<TR>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    44         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg</TD>
    45         -</TR>
    46         -<TR>
    47         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg</TD>
    48         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
    49         -</TR>
    50         -<TR>
    51         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
    52         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    53         -</TR>
    54         -<TR>
    55         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
    56         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
    57         -</TR>
    58         -<TR>
    59         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
    60         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
    61         -</TR>
    62         -<TR>
    63         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
    64         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
    65         -</TR>
    66         -<TR>
    67         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
    68         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
    69         -</TR>
    70         -<TR>
    71         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
    72         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor</TD>
    73         -</TR>
    74         -<TR>
    75         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont</TD>
    76         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight</TD>
    77         -</TR>
    78         -<TR>
    79         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify</TD>
    80         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth</TD>
    81         -</TR>
    82         -<TR>
    83         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
    84         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
    85         -</TR>
    86         -<TR>
    87         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
    88         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
    89         -</TR>
    90         -<TR>
    91         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
    92         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
    93         -</TR>
    94         -<TR>
    95         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdeditable (see <B>-editable</B>)</TD>
    96         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
    97         -</TR>
    98         -<TR>
    99         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
   100         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
   101         -</TR>
   102         -<TR>
   103         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdstate (see <B>-state</B>)</TD>
   104         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
   105         -</TR>
   106         -<TR>
   107         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
   108         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
   109         -</TR>
   110         -<TR>
   111         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
   112         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
   113         -</TR>
   114         -<TR>
   115         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
   116         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
   117         -</TR>
   118         -<TR>
   119         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
   120         -</TABLE></DD>
   121         -</DL>
   122         -<DL>
   123         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
   124         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
   125         -<TR>
   126         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
   127         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
   128         -</TR>
   129         -</TABLE></DD>
   130         -</DL>
   131         -<DL>
   132         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   133         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   134         - <I>option</I>
   135         -</DD>
   136         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   137         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   138         -</DD>
   139         -</DL>
   140         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   141         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   142         -<P>
   143         -
   144         -PasswdDlg provides a simple way to display a login/password dialog.
   145         -PasswdDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, and return the value of login
   146         -and password in a list, or an empty list if it is destroyed or user press cancel.
   147         -When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
   148         -<BR>Additionnal resources can be set to modify other text:
   149         -<PRE>
   150         -    *loginName     Label for login LabelEntry
   151         -    *passwordName  Label for password LabelEntry
   152         -</PRE>
   153         -
   154         -</P>
   155         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   156         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   157         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
   158         -<DD>
   159         -
   160         -Specifies a command to call when user press ok button.
   161         -
   162         -</DD>
   163         -</DL>
   164         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
   165         -<DD>
   166         -
   167         -Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
   168         -<DD>
   169         -<P>
   170         -<DL COMPACT>
   171         -<DT>
   172         -<B>ok</B>
   173         -<DD>
   174         -Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
   175         -<DT>
   176         -<B>okcancel</B>
   177         -<DD>
   178         -Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
   179         -</DL COMPACT>
   180         -
   181         -</DD>
   182         -</DL>
   183         -
   184         -</DD>
   185         -</DL>
   186         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   187         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   188         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   189         - <I>option</I>
   190         -</DT><DD>
   191         -
   192         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   193         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   194         -</DD></DL>
   195         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   196         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   197         -</DT><DD>
   198         -
   199         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   200         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   201         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   202         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   203         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   204         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   205         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   206         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   207         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   208         -
   209         -</DD></DL>
   210         -<HR>
   211         -
   212         -<ADRESS>Stephane Lavirotte <A HREF="mailto:Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr">(Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr)</A></ADRESS>
   213         -
   214         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressBar.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressBar</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ProgressBar</B>
     6         - - Progress indicator widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -</TABLE></DD>
    28         -</DL>
    29         -<DL>
    30         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    31         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-maximum">-maximum</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-variable">-variable</A></TR>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    42         -</TABLE></DD>
    43         -</DL>
    44         -<DL>
    45         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    46         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    47         - <I>option</I>
    48         -</DD>
    49         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    50         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    51         -</DD>
    52         -</DL>
    53         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    54         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    55         -<P>
    56         -
    57         -ProgressBar widget indicates the user the progress of a lengthly operation.
    58         -It is used by <A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A>
    59         -and <A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A>.
    60         -</P>
    61         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    62         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    63         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    64         -<DD>
    65         -
    66         -Specifies the desired height for the progress indicator.
    67         -</DD>
    68         -</DL>
    69         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-maximum"><B>-maximum</B></A></DT>
    70         -<DD>
    71         -
    72         -Specifies the maximum value of the variable.  This value must be
    73         -greater than zero.
    74         -
    75         -</DD>
    76         -</DL>
    77         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
    78         -<DD>
    79         -
    80         -Specifies the type of the ProgressBar. Must be one of <B>normal</B>,
    81         -<B>incremental</B>,  <B>infinite</B> or <B>nonincremental_infinite</B>.
    82         -
    83         -<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>, the progress indicator is drawn
    84         -proportional to the variable value and <B>maximum</B> option each time the
    85         -variable is set.
    86         -
    87         -<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>incremental</I>, the value of the progress
    88         -indicator is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is
    89         -set by its value. The progress indicator is drawn proportional to the internal
    90         -value and
    91         -<B>maximum</B> option.
    92         -
    93         -<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>infinite</I>, the value of the progress indicator
    94         -is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is set by its
    95         -value. The progress indicator moves from left to right if internal value
    96         -(modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than <B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left
    97         -if internal value is greater than <B>maximum</B>/2.
    98         -
    99         -<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>nonincremental_infinite</I>, the value of the
   100         -progress indicator taken from the variable value, The progress indicator moves
   101         -from left to right if variable value (modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than
   102         -<B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left if internal value is greater than
   103         -<B>maximum</B>/2.
   104         -
   105         -<BR><BR>See <B>-variable</B> option for special case of its value,
   106         -
   107         -<BR><BR>Default value for <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>.
   108         -
   109         -</DD>
   110         -</DL>
   111         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
   112         -<DD>
   113         -
   114         -Specifies the variable attached to the progress indicator.  Progress indicator
   115         -is updated when the value of the variable changes.  If the value of the
   116         -variable is negative, the progress indicator is not displayed (it is drawn flat
   117         -with <B>background</B> color - usefull for ProgressDlg to make it
   118         -invisible). If its value 0, progress indicator is reinitialized.
   119         -
   120         -</DD>
   121         -</DL>
   122         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   123         -<DD>
   124         -
   125         -Specifies the desired width for the progress indicator.
   126         -</DD>
   127         -</DL>
   128         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   129         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   130         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   131         - <I>option</I>
   132         -</DT><DD>
   133         -
   134         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   135         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   136         -</DD></DL>
   137         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   138         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   139         -</DT><DD>
   140         -
   141         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   142         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   143         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   144         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   145         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   146         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   147         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   148         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   149         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   150         -
   151         -</DD></DL>
   152         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ProgressDlg.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ProgressDlg</B>
     6         - - Progress indicator dialog box
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -</TABLE></DD>
    20         -</DL>
    21         -<DL>
    22         -<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
    23         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-separator</TD>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -</TABLE></DD>
    33         -</DL>
    34         -<DL>
    35         -<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
    36         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    37         -<TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
    40         -</TR>
    41         -<TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-maximum</TD>
    44         -</TR>
    45         -<TR>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
    47         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-troughcolor</TD>
    48         -</TR>
    49         -<TR>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-type</TD>
    51         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-variable</TD>
    52         -</TR>
    53         -</TABLE></DD>
    54         -</DL>
    55         -<DL>
    56         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    57         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    58         -<TR>
    59         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
    60         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    61         -</TR>
    62         -<TR>
    63         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-stop">-stop</A></TR>
    64         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    65         -</TR>
    66         -</TABLE></DD>
    67         -</DL>
    68         -<DL>
    69         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    70         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    71         - <I>option</I>
    72         -</DD>
    73         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    74         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    75         -</DD>
    76         -</DL>
    77         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    78         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    79         -<P>
    80         -
    81         -ProgressDlg provides a simple way to display a progress indicator dialog.
    82         -ProgressDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, set a local
    83         -grab to it and immediatly return. The dialog is updated by modifying the 
    84         -value of the variable of options <B>-textvariable</B> and <B>-variable</B>.
    85         -You have to destroy the dialog after use.
    86         -
    87         -</P>
    88         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    89         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    90         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
    91         -<DD>
    92         -
    93         -Specifies a command to call when user press stop button.  Note that it
    94         -is the program's responsibility to periodically call <B>update</B> so
    95         -that button press events can be generated.
    96         -
    97         -</DD>
    98         -</DL>
    99         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   100         -<DD>
   101         -
   102         -Specifies a desired height for the label in lines of text.
   103         -
   104         -</DD>
   105         -</DL>
   106         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-stop"><B>-stop</B></A></DT>
   107         -<DD>
   108         -
   109         -Specifies the text of the button typically used to stop process. If empty, no button will
   110         -be drawn. This can be a symbolic name.
   111         -
   112         -</DD>
   113         -</DL>
   114         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   115         -<DD>
   116         -
   117         -Specifies a desired width for the label in characters.
   118         -
   119         -</DD>
   120         -</DL>
   121         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   122         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   123         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   124         - <I>option</I>
   125         -</DT><DD>
   126         -
   127         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   128         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   129         -</DD></DL>
   130         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   131         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   132         -</DT><DD>
   133         -
   134         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   135         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   136         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   137         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   138         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   139         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   140         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   141         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   142         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   143         -
   144         -</DD></DL>
   145         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollView.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollView</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ScrollView</B>
     6         - - Display the visible area of a scrolled window
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollView</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -</TABLE></DD>
    24         -</DL>
    25         -<DL>
    26         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    27         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-fill">-fill</A></TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-window">-window</A></TR>
    38         -</TABLE></DD>
    39         -</DL>
    40         -<DL>
    41         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    42         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    43         - <I>option</I>
    44         -</DD>
    45         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    46         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    47         -</DD>
    48         -</DL>
    49         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    50         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    51         -<P>
    52         -
    53         -ScrollView displays the visible area of a scrolled window within
    54         -its scroll region.
    55         -
    56         -</P>
    57         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    58         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    59         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
    60         -<DD>
    61         -
    62         -Specifies the fill color of the rectangle.
    63         -
    64         -</DD>
    65         -</DL>
    66         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT>
    67         -<DD>
    68         -
    69         -Specifies the color of the border of the rectangle.
    70         -
    71         -</DD>
    72         -</DL>
    73         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    74         -<DD>
    75         -
    76         -Specifies the desired height for the ScrollView.
    77         -</DD>
    78         -</DL>
    79         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
    80         -<DD>
    81         -
    82         -Specifies the desired width for the ScrollView.
    83         -</DD>
    84         -</DL>
    85         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
    86         -<DD>
    87         -
    88         -Specifies the window to view. This widget must have <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
    89         -<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options, and respond to <B>xview</B> and <B>yview</B> command.
    90         -In order to make ScrollView working with other scrollbar, <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
    91         -<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options of the widget must be set before the widget is passed to
    92         -the <B>-window</B> option of the ScrollView (for example, if the widget is handled by
    93         -a ScrolledWindow, call <B>setwidget</B> before setting <B>-window</B> option).
    94         -
    95         -</DD>
    96         -</DL>
    97         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    98         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    99         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   100         - <I>option</I>
   101         -</DT><DD>
   102         -
   103         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   104         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   105         -</DD></DL>
   106         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   107         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   108         -</DT><DD>
   109         -
   110         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   111         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   112         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   113         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   114         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   115         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   116         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   117         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   118         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   119         -
   120         -</DD></DL>
   121         -<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
   122         -
   123         -<DL><DT>If mouse button 1 is pressed and dragged over the ScrollView, the top left corner of
   124         -the visible area of the scrolled window is moved proportionally to the mouse displacement.
   125         -</DT></DL>
   126         -<DL><DT>If mouse button 3 is pressed over the ScrollView, the top left corner of the visible
   127         -area is proportionally set to this point.
   128         -</DT></DL>
   129         -
   130         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrollableFrame.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollableFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ScrollableFrame</B>
     6         - - Scrollable frame containing widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollableFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
    21         -</TABLE></DD>
    22         -<BR>
    23         -Themed widget (<B>Widget::theme true</B>): Options <B>-background</B> and <B>-bg</B> are not available.
    24         -Modify style <B>TFrame</B> property <B>-background</B> instead.
    25         -</DL>
    26         -<DL>
    27         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    28         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    29         -<TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areaheight">-areaheight</A></TR>
    31         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areawidth">-areawidth</A></TR>
    32         -</TR>
    33         -<TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedheight">-constrainedheight</A></TR>
    35         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedwidth">-constrainedwidth</A></TR>
    36         -</TR>
    37         -<TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
    40         -</TR>
    41         -<TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-xscrollincrement">-xscrollincrement</A></TR>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-yscrollincrement">-yscrollincrement</A></TR>
    44         -</TR>
    45         -</TABLE></DD>
    46         -</DL>
    47         -<DL>
    48         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    49         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    50         - <I>option</I>
    51         -</DD>
    52         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    53         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    54         -</DD>
    55         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    56         -</DD>
    57         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
    58         - <I>widget</I>
    59         - ?<I>vert</I>?
    60         - ?<I>horz</I>?
    61         -</DD>
    62         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
    63         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    64         -</DD>
    65         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
    66         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    67         -</DD>
    68         -</DL>
    69         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    70         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    71         -<P>
    72         -
    73         -ScrollableFrame widget containing widget.
    74         -
    75         -</P>
    76         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    77         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    78         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-areaheight"><B>-areaheight</B></A></DT>
    79         -<DD>
    80         -
    81         -Specifies the height for the scrollable area. If zero, then the height
    82         -of the scrollable area is made just large enough to hold all its children.
    83         -</DD>
    84         -</DL>
    85         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-areawidth"><B>-areawidth</B></A></DT>
    86         -<DD>
    87         -
    88         -Specifies the width for the scrollable area. If zero, then the width
    89         -of the scrollable area window is made just large enough to hold all its children.
    90         -</DD>
    91         -</DL>
    92         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedheight"><B>-constrainedheight</B></A></DT>
    93         -<DD>
    94         -
    95         -Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same height of the
    96         -scrolled window. If true, vertical scrollbar is not needed.
    97         -
    98         -</DD>
    99         -</DL>
   100         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedwidth"><B>-constrainedwidth</B></A></DT>
   101         -<DD>
   102         -
   103         -Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same width of the
   104         -scrolled window. If true, horizontal scrollbar is not needed.
   105         -
   106         -</DD>
   107         -</DL>
   108         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   109         -<DD>
   110         -
   111         -Specifies the desired height for the window in pixels.
   112         -
   113         -</DD>
   114         -</DL>
   115         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   116         -<DD>
   117         -
   118         -Specifies the desired width for the window in pixels.
   119         -
   120         -</DD>
   121         -</DL>
   122         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-xscrollincrement"><B>-xscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
   123         -<DD>
   124         -
   125         -See <B>xscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
   126         -
   127         -</DD>
   128         -</DL>
   129         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-yscrollincrement"><B>-yscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
   130         -<DD>
   131         -
   132         -See <B>yscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.
   133         -
   134         -</DD>
   135         -</DL>
   136         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   137         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   138         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   139         - <I>option</I>
   140         -</DT><DD>
   141         -
   142         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   143         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   144         -</DD></DL>
   145         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   146         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   147         -</DT><DD>
   148         -
   149         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   150         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   151         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   152         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   153         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   154         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   155         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   156         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   157         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   158         -
   159         -</DD></DL>
   160         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   161         -</DT><DD>
   162         -
   163         -Return the pathname of the scrolled frame where widget should be created.
   164         -
   165         -</DD></DL>
   166         -<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
   167         - <I>widget</I>
   168         - ?<I>vert</I>?
   169         - ?<I>horz</I>?
   170         -</DT><DD>
   171         -
   172         -Arrange scrollable area to make <I>widget</I> visible in the window.
   173         -<I>vert</I> and <I>horz</I> specify which part of <I>widget</I> must be preferably
   174         -visible, in case where <I>widget</I> is too tall or too large to be entirely visible.
   175         -<I>vert</I> must be <B>top</B> (the default) or <B>bottom</B>,
   176         -and <I>horz</I> must be <B>left</B> (the default) or <B>right</B>.
   177         -If <I>vert</I> or <I>horz</I> is not a valid value, area is not scrolled in this direction.
   178         -
   179         -</DD></DL>
   180         -<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
   181         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   182         -</DT><DD>
   183         -
   184         -Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   185         -
   186         -</DD></DL>
   187         -<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
   188         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   189         -</DT><DD>
   190         -
   191         -Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   192         -
   193         -</DD></DL>
   194         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/ScrolledWindow.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>ScrolledWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>ScrolledWindow</B>
     6         - - Generic scrolled widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrolledWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
    15         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    16         -<TR>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    18         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    19         -</TR>
    20         -<TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    22         -</TABLE></DD>
    23         -<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
    24         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    25         -<TR>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    27         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    28         -</TR>
    29         -<TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;(<B>-bg</B> has no effect)</TD>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -</TABLE></DD>
    33         -</DL>
    34         -<DL>
    35         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    36         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    37         -<TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-auto">-auto</A></TR>
    39         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
    40         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-managed">-managed</A></TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-scrollbar">-scrollbar</A></TR>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sides">-sides</A></TR>
    43         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-size">-size</A></TR>
    44         -</TR>
    45         -</TABLE></DD>
    46         -</DL>
    47         -<DL>
    48         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    49         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    50         - <I>option</I>
    51         -</DD>
    52         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    53         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    54         -</DD>
    55         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    56         -</DD>
    57         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setwidget"><B>setwidget</B></A>
    58         - <I>widget</I>
    59         -</DD>
    60         -</DL>
    61         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    62         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    63         -<P>
    64         -
    65         -ScrolledWindow enables user to create easily a widget with its scrollbar.
    66         -Scrollbars are created by ScrolledWindow and scroll commands are automatically associated to
    67         -a scrollable widget with <B>ScrolledWindow::setwidget</B>.
    68         -</P>
    69         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    70         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    71         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-auto"><B>-auto</B></A></DT>
    72         -<DD>
    73         -
    74         -Specifies the desired auto managed scrollbar:
    75         -<LI><B>none</B> means scrollbar are always drawn
    76         -<LI><B>horizontal</B> means horizontal scrollbar is drawn as needed
    77         -<LI><B>vertical</B> means vertical scrollbar is drawn as needed
    78         -<LI><B>both</B> means horizontal and vertical scrollbars are drawn as needed (default value)
    79         -</DD>
    80         -</DL>
    81         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    82         -<DD>
    83         -
    84         -Padding in pixels between client widget and scrollbars.
    85         -Default value: <B>1</B>.
    86         -</DD>
    87         -</DL>
    88         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-managed"><B>-managed (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    89         -<DD>
    90         -
    91         -If true, scrollbar are managed during creation, so their size are included in the requested size of the
    92         -ScrolledWindow. If false, they are not.
    93         -Default value: <B>true</B>.
    94         -</DD>
    95         -</DL>
    96         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-scrollbar"><B>-scrollbar</B></A></DT>
    97         -<DD>
    98         -
    99         -Specifies the desired scrollbar: <B>none</B>, <B>horizontal</B>, <B>vertical</B>
   100         -or <B>both</B> (default value).
   101         -</DD>
   102         -</DL>
   103         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-sides"><B>-sides (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   104         -<DD>
   105         -
   106         -Side of the scrollbars.
   107         -Possible values are: <B>ne</B>, <B>en</B>, <B>nw</B>, <B>wn</B>, <B>se</B> (default value), <B>es</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>ws</B>.
   108         -</DD>
   109         -</DL>
   110         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-size"><B>-size (read-only)</B></A></DT>
   111         -<DD>
   112         -
   113         -Size of the scrollbars in pixels.
   114         -Use </B>0</B> for standard size (default value).<BR>
   115         -This option has no effect if widget is <I>themed</I>.
   116         -</DD>
   117         -</DL>
   118         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   119         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   120         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   121         - <I>option</I>
   122         -</DT><DD>
   123         -
   124         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   125         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   126         -</DD></DL>
   127         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   128         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   129         -</DT><DD>
   130         -
   131         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   132         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   133         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   134         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   135         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   136         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   137         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   138         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   139         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   140         -
   141         -</DD></DL>
   142         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   143         -</DT><DD>
   144         -
   145         -Return the pathname of the frame where the scrolled widget should be created. This command
   146         -is no longer needed. You can directly create the scrolled widget as the child
   147         -of <I>pathName</I>.
   148         -</DD></DL>
   149         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setwidget"><I>pathName</I> <B>setwidget</B></A>
   150         - <I>widget</I>
   151         -</DT><DD>
   152         -
   153         -Associate <I>widget</I> to the the scrollbars. <I>widget</I> becomes
   154         -managed by the ScrolledWindow.  The user should not attempt to manage
   155         -<I>widget</I> until it is no longer managed by the ScrolledWindow.
   156         -<I>widget</I> must be a scrollable widget, i.e. have the options
   157         -<B>xscrollcommand</B>/<B>yscrollcommand</B> and the command <B>xview</B>/<B>yview</B>,
   158         -such as canvas or text.
   159         -</DD></DL>
   160         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectColor.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>SelectColor</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>SelectColor</B>
     6         - - Color selection widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectColor</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-color">-color</A></td>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></td>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-placement">-placement</A></td>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></td>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></td>
    25         -</TR>
    26         -</TABLE></DD>
    27         -</DL>
    28         -<DL>
    29         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    30         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    31         - <I>option</I>
    32         -</DD>
    33         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    34         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    35         -</DD>
    36         -<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#dialog"><B>dialog</B></A>
    37         - <I>pathName</I>
    38         - <I>?option value ...?</I>
    39         -</DD>
    40         -<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#menu"><B>menu</B></A>
    41         - <I>pathName</I>
    42         - <I>placement</I>
    43         - <I>?option value ...?</I>
    44         -</DD>
    45         -<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setcolor"><B>setcolor</B></A>
    46         - <I>index</I>
    47         - <I>color</I>
    48         -</DD>
    49         -</DL>
    50         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    51         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    52         -<P>
    53         -
    54         -SelectColor provides a simple way to select color. It can be displayed
    55         -as a dialog box or as a menubutton.
    56         -
    57         -</P>
    58         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    59         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    60         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-color"><B>-color</B></A></DT>
    61         -<DD>
    62         -
    63         -Specifies the color value of the widget.
    64         -
    65         -</DD>
    66         -</DL>
    67         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
    68         -<DD>
    69         -
    70         -Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
    71         -root window.
    72         -</DD>
    73         -</DL>
    74         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-placement"><B>-placement</B></A></DT>
    75         -<DD>
    76         -
    77         -Where to place the <i>popup</i> color dialog when displaying it.
    78         -Must be any of: <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
    79         -<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
    80         -placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
    81         -</DD>
    82         -</DL>
    83         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
    84         -<DD>
    85         -
    86         -Title of the Dialog toplevel.
    87         -
    88         -</DD>
    89         -</DL>
    90         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type (read-only)</B></A></DT>
    91         -<DD>
    92         -
    93         -Specifies the type of the SelectColor widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or
    94         -<B>popup</B>.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>,
    95         -SelectColor::<B>create</B> directly creates the dialog, displays it and
    96         -return an empty string if cancel button is pressed or if dialog is destroyed,
    97         -and the selected color if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog is
    98         -destroyed.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>popup</I>,
    99         -SelectColor::<B>create</B> creates a small, popup dialog with a small set of
   100         -predefined colors and a button to activate a full color dialog.
   101         -
   102         -</DD>
   103         -</DL>
   104         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   105         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   106         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   107         - <I>option</I>
   108         -</DT><DD>
   109         -
   110         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   111         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   112         -</DD></DL>
   113         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   114         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   115         -</DT><DD>
   116         -
   117         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   118         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   119         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   120         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   121         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   122         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   123         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   124         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   125         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   126         -
   127         -</DD></DL>
   128         -<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>dialog</B></A>
   129         - <I>pathName</I>
   130         - <I>?option value ...?</I>
   131         -</DT><DD>
   132         -
   133         -Creates a dialog for the user to select a custom color.
   134         -
   135         -</DD></DL>
   136         -
   137         -<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>menu</B></A>
   138         - <I>pathName</I>
   139         - <I>placement</I>
   140         - <I>?option value ...?</I>
   141         -</DT><DD>
   142         -
   143         -Creates a small, popup dialog for the user to select from a predefined list
   144         -of colors with an additional button to display a full color dialog.
   145         -
   146         -<p>
   147         -<i>placement</i> can be any of <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
   148         -<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
   149         -placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
   150         -</p>
   151         -
   152         -</DD></DL>
   153         -
   154         -</DD></DL>
   155         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setcolor">SelectColor::<B>setcolor</B></A>
   156         - <I>index</I>
   157         - <I>color</I>
   158         -</DT><DD>
   159         -
   160         -Set the value of user predefined color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>.
   161         -<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10.
   162         -
   163         -</DD></DL>
   164         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SelectFont.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>SelectFont</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>SelectFont</B>
     6         - - Font selection widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectFont</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -</TABLE></DD>
    20         -</DL>
    21         -<DL>
    22         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    23         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
    26         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-initialcolor">-initialcolor</A></TR>
    27         -</TR>
    28         -<TR>
    29         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-nosizes">-nosizes</A></TR>
    30         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
    31         -</TR>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sampletext">-sampletext</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
    38         -</TABLE></DD>
    39         -</DL>
    40         -<DL>
    41         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    42         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    43         - <I>option</I>
    44         -</DD>
    45         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    46         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    47         -</DD>
    48         -<DD>SelectFont::<A HREF="#loadfont"><B>loadfont</B></A>
    49         -</DD>
    50         -</DL>
    51         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    52         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    53         -<P>
    54         -
    55         -SelectFont provides a simple way to choose font. It can be displayed
    56         -as a dialog box or as a toolbar.
    57         -<BR>Textual items in Dialog box uses <B>-name</B> options so they
    58         -can be translated to any language. Symbolic name used are
    59         -<B>ok</B>, <B>cancel</B>, <B>font</B>, <B>size</B>, <B>style</B>,
    60         -<B>bold</B>, <B>italic</B>, <B>underline</B> and <B>overstrike</B>.
    61         -
    62         -</P>
    63         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    64         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    65         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
    66         -<DD>
    67         -
    68         -Specifies a command to call when user select a new font when SelectFont <B>type</B>
    69         -option is <I>toolbar</I>.
    70         -
    71         -</DD>
    72         -</DL>
    73         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-initialcolor"><B>-initialcolor</B></A></DT>
    74         -<DD>
    75         -
    76         -If specified, add an additional button that lets the user pick a
    77         -color.  This option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
    78         -</DD>
    79         -</DL>
    80         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-nosizes"><B>-nosizes</B></A></DT>
    81         -<DD>
    82         -
    83         -If true, don't show the listbox containing valid font sizes.  This
    84         -option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
    85         -</DD>
    86         -</DL>
    87         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
    88         -<DD>
    89         -
    90         -Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
    91         -root window.
    92         -</DD>
    93         -</DL>
    94         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-sampletext"><B>-sampletext</B></A></DT>
    95         -<DD>
    96         -
    97         -Specifies the text displayed in the preview area.
    98         -
    99         -</DD>
   100         -</DL>
   101         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
   102         -<DD>
   103         -
   104         -Title of the Dialog toplevel.
   105         -
   106         -</DD>
   107         -</DL>
   108         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
   109         -<DD>
   110         -
   111         -Specifies the type of the SelectFont widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or <B>toolbar</B>.
   112         -<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> directly creates the 
   113         -dialog, displays it and return an empty string if cancel button is
   114         -pressed or if dialog is destroyed, and the selected font (and color
   115         -if <B>initialcolor</B>) if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog
   116         -is destroyed.
   117         -<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>toolbar</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> returns the pathname
   118         -of the widget created.
   119         -
   120         -</DD>
   121         -</DL>
   122         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   123         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   124         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   125         - <I>option</I>
   126         -</DT><DD>
   127         -
   128         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   129         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   130         -</DD></DL>
   131         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   132         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   133         -</DT><DD>
   134         -
   135         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   136         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   137         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   138         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   139         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   140         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   141         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   142         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   143         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   144         -
   145         -</DD></DL>
   146         -<DL><DT><A NAME="loadfont">SelectFont::<B>loadfont</B></A>
   147         -</DT><DD>
   148         -
   149         -Load the font available in the system.
   150         -
   151         -</DD></DL>
   152         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Separator.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Separator</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Separator</B>
     6         - - 3D separator widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Separator</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -</TABLE></DD>
    20         -</DL>
    21         -<DL>
    22         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    23         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    24         -<TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    26         -</TABLE></DD>
    27         -</DL>
    28         -<DL>
    29         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    30         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    31         - <I>option</I>
    32         -</DD>
    33         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    34         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    35         -</DD>
    36         -</DL>
    37         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    38         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    39         -<P>
    40         -
    41         -Separator is a widget that display an horizontal or vertical 3-D line.
    42         -
    43         -</P>
    44         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    45         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    46         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
    47         -<DD>
    48         -
    49         -Specifies the relief of the Separator. Must be <B>groove</B> (the default) or <B>ridge</B>.
    50         -
    51         -</DD>
    52         -</DL>
    53         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    54         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    55         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
    56         - <I>option</I>
    57         -</DT><DD>
    58         -
    59         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
    60         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
    61         -</DD></DL>
    62         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
    63         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    64         -</DT><DD>
    65         -
    66         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
    67         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
    68         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
    69         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
    70         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
    71         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
    72         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
    73         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
    74         -Read-only options are not be modified.
    75         -
    76         -</DD></DL>
    77         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/SpinBox.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>SpinBox</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>SpinBox</B>
     6         - - SpinBox widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SpinBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -</TABLE></DD>
    28         -</DL>
    29         -<DL>
    30         -<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
    31         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
    42         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
    43         -</TR>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
    47         -</TR>
    48         -<TR>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
    50         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
    51         -</TR>
    52         -<TR>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
    54         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
    55         -</TR>
    56         -<TR>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
    58         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
    59         -</TR>
    60         -<TR>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
    62         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
    63         -</TR>
    64         -<TR>
    65         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
    66         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
    67         -</TR>
    68         -<TR>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
    70         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
    71         -</TR>
    72         -<TR>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
    74         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
    75         -</TR>
    76         -<TR>
    77         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
    78         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
    79         -</TR>
    80         -<TR>
    81         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
    82         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
    83         -</TR>
    84         -<TR>
    85         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
    86         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
    87         -</TR>
    88         -<TR>
    89         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
    90         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
    91         -</TR>
    92         -<TR>
    93         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
    94         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
    95         -</TR>
    96         -<TR>
    97         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
    98         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
    99         -</TR>
   100         -<TR>
   101         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
   102         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
   103         -</TR>
   104         -<TR>
   105         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
   106         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
   107         -</TR>
   108         -</TABLE></DD>
   109         -</DL>
   110         -<DL>
   111         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
   112         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
   113         -<TR>
   114         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TR>
   115         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-range">-range</A></TR>
   116         -</TR>
   117         -<TR>
   118         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TR>
   119         -</TABLE></DD>
   120         -</DL>
   121         -<DL>
   122         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   123         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
   124         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   125         -</DD>
   126         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   127         - <I>option</I>
   128         -</DD>
   129         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   130         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   131         -</DD>
   132         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A>
   133         -</DD>
   134         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
   135         - <I>index</I>
   136         -</DD>
   137         -</DL>
   138         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   139         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   140         -<P>
   141         -
   142         -SpinBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by the <B>values</B>
   143         -option or a set of values defined by a mininum, a maximum and an increment.
   144         -Notice that <B>range</B> option defines a list of values, so <B>getvalue</B> and
   145         -<B>setvalue</B> work with both values and range.
   146         -
   147         -</P>
   148         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   149         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   150         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
   151         -<DD>
   152         -
   153         -Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the SpinBox.
   154         -</DD>
   155         -</DL>
   156         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-range"><B>-range</B></A></DT>
   157         -<DD>
   158         -
   159         -Specifies a list of three intergers (or real) describing the minimum, maximum and increment
   160         -of the SpinBox.
   161         -</DD>
   162         -</DL>
   163         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
   164         -<DD>
   165         -
   166         -Specifies the values accepted by the SpinBox. This option takes precedence over
   167         -<B>range</B> option.
   168         -</DD>
   169         -</DL>
   170         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   171         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   172         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
   173         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   174         -</DT><DD>
   175         -
   176         -Set bindings on the entry widget.
   177         -
   178         -</DD></DL>
   179         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   180         - <I>option</I>
   181         -</DT><DD>
   182         -
   183         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   184         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   185         -</DD></DL>
   186         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   187         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   188         -</DT><DD>
   189         -
   190         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
   191         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
   192         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
   193         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
   194         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
   195         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
   196         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   197         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   198         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   199         -
   200         -</DD></DL>
   201         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
   202         -</DT><DD>
   203         -
   204         -Returns the index of the current text of the SpinBox in the list of values,
   205         -or -1 if it doesn't match any value.
   206         -
   207         -</DD></DL>
   208         -<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
   209         - <I>index</I>
   210         -</DT><DD>
   211         -
   212         -Set the text of the SpinBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
   213         -<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
   214         -<P>
   215         -<DL COMPACT>
   216         -<DT>
   217         -<B>last</B>
   218         -<DD>
   219         -Specifies the last element of the list of values.
   220         -<DT><B>first</B>
   221         -<DD>
   222         -Specifies the first element of the list of values.
   223         -<DT>
   224         -<B>next</B>
   225         -<DD>
   226         -Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
   227         -of values.
   228         -<DT><B>previous</B>
   229         -<DD>
   230         -Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
   231         -of values.
   232         -<DT>
   233         -@<I>number</I>
   234         -<DD>
   235         -Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
   236         -</DL>
   237         -
   238         -</DD></DL>
   239         -<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>
   240         -
   241         -When Entry of the SpinBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
   242         -to the default Entry bindings:
   243         -<UL>
   244         -<LI>Page up set the value of the SpinBox to the last value.
   245         -<LI>Page down set the value of the SpinBox to the first value.
   246         -<LI>Arrow up set the value of the SpinBox to the next value.
   247         -<LI>Arrow down set the value of the SpinBox to the previous value.
   248         -</UL>
   249         -
   250         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/StatusBar.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>StatusBar</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>StatusBar</B>
     6         - - status bar widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>StatusBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -</TABLE></DD>
    28         -</DL>
    29         -<DL>
    30         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    31         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showresize">-showresize</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
    38         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TR>
    39         -</TR>
    40         -<TR>
    41         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A>
    42         -</TR>
    43         -</TABLE></DD>
    44         -</DL>
    45         -<DL>
    46         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    47         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    48         - <I>option</I>
    49         -</DD>
    50         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    51         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    52         -</DD>
    53         -</DL>
    54         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    55         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    56         -
    57         -<P>
    58         -StatusBar widget is a simple container widget with a corner resize control,
    59         -meant to be placed at the bottom of a toplevel dialog.
    60         -</P>
    61         -
    62         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    63         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    64         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
    65         -<DD>
    66         -Specifies the desired height for the widget.
    67         -</DD>
    68         -</DL>
    69         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-showresize"><B>-showresize</B></A></DT>
    70         -<DD>
    71         -Specifies whether to show the corner resize control.
    72         -</DD>
    73         -</DL>
    74         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad</B></A></DT>
    75         -<DD>
    76         -The spacing to place around the status bar.
    77         -</DD>
    78         -</DL>
    79         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
    80         -<DD>
    81         -The spacing to place around individual status bar items.
    82         -</DD>
    83         -</DL>
    84         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
    85         -<DD>
    86         -Specifies the desired width for the widget.
    87         -</DD>
    88         -</DL>
    89         -
    90         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    91         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    92         -<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
    93         - ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    94         -</DT><DD>
    95         -Add a widget to the status bar. Possible options are:
    96         -<DL>
    97         -<DT><B>-weight</B></DT>
    98         -<DD>Weighting of this item for resizing (passed to <B>grid</B>).</DD>
    99         -<DT><B>-separator</B></DT>
   100         -<DD>Whether to use a separator for this item.</DD>
   101         -<DT><B>-sticky</B></DT>
   102         -<DD>Passed on to grid.</DD>
   103         -<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
   104         -<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
   105         -</DL>
   106         -</DD>
   107         -</DL>
   108         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   109         - <I>option</I>
   110         -</DT><DD>
   111         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   112         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   113         -</DD>
   114         -</DL>
   115         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   116         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   117         -</DT><DD>
   118         -
   119         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
   120         -<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
   121         -options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
   122         -<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
   123         -<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
   124         -the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
   125         -<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
   126         -given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
   127         -returns an empty string.
   128         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   129         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   130         -</DD>
   131         -</DL>
   132         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   133         -<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
   134         -</DT><DD>
   135         -Delete a widget and associated state from the status bar.</DD>
   136         -</DL>
   137         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   138         -</DT><DD>
   139         -Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
   140         -created.</DD>
   141         -</DD>
   142         -</DL>
   143         -<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
   144         -</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
   145         -<DL>
   146         -
   147         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/TitleFrame.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>TitleFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>TitleFrame</B>
     6         - - Frame with a title
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>TitleFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
    21         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
    25         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -</TABLE></DD>
    28         -</DL>
    29         -<DL>
    30         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    31         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    32         -<TR>
    33         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-baseline">-baseline</A></TR>
    34         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
    35         -</TR>
    36         -<TR>
    37         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
    38         -</TABLE></DD>
    39         -</DL>
    40         -<DL>
    41         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    42         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    43         - <I>option</I>
    44         -</DD>
    45         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    46         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    47         -</DD>
    48         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
    49         -</DD>
    50         -</DL>
    51         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
    52         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
    53         -<P>
    54         -
    55         -TitleFrame enables user to create a frame with a title like XmFrame Motif widget.
    56         -</P>
    57         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    58         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
    59         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-baseline"><B>-baseline</B></A></DT>
    60         -<DD>
    61         -
    62         -Specifies the vertical alignment of the title: <B>top</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
    63         -</DD>
    64         -</DL>
    65         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
    66         -<DD>
    67         -
    68         -Specifies a pad between the border of the frame and the user frame.
    69         -The value is in screen units.
    70         -</DD>
    71         -</DL>
    72         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
    73         -<DD>
    74         -
    75         -Specifies the horizontal alignment of the title: <B>left</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>right</B>.
    76         -</DD>
    77         -</DL>
    78         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
    79         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
    80         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
    81         - <I>option</I>
    82         -</DT><DD>
    83         -
    84         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
    85         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
    86         -</DD></DL>
    87         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
    88         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
    89         -</DT><DD>
    90         -
    91         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
    92         -returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
    93         -If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
    94         -describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
    95         -sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
    96         -more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
    97         -option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
    98         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
    99         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   100         -
   101         -</DD></DL>
   102         -<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
   103         -</DT><DD>
   104         -
   105         -Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
   106         -</DD></DL>
   107         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Tree.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Tree</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     5         -<DD><B>Tree</B>
     6         - - Tree widget
     7         -</DD></DL>
     8         -<DL>
     9         -<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
    10         -<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Tree</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
    11         -</DL>
    12         -<DL>
    13         -<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
    14         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    15         -<TR>
    16         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
    17         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
    18         -</TR>
    19         -<TR>
    20         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
    21         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
    22         -</TR>
    23         -<TR>
    24         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
    25         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
    26         -</TR>
    27         -<TR>
    28         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    29         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
    30         -</TR>
    31         -<TR>
    32         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
    33         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
    34         -</TR>
    35         -<TR>
    36         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
    37         -    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
    38         -</TR>
    39         -</TABLE></DD>
    40         -</DL>
    41         -<DL>
    42         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
    43         -<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
    44         -<TR>
    45         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-closecmd">-closecmd</A></TD>
    46         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossfill">-crossfill</A></TD>
    47         -<TR>
    48         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossclosebitmap">-crossclosebitmap</A></TD>
    49         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crosscloseimage">-crosscloseimage</A></TD>
    50         -</TR>
    51         -<TR>
    52         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenbitmap">-crossopenbitmap</A></TD>
    53         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenimage">-crossopenimage</A></TD>
    54         -</TR>
    55         -<TR>
    56         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
    57         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
    58         -</TR>
    59         -<TR>
    60         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
    61         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
    62         -</TR>
    63         -<TR>
    64         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
    65         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
    66         -</TR>
    67         -<TR>
    68         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
    69         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
    70         -</TR>
    71         -<TR>
    72         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
    73         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
    74         -</TR>
    75         -<TR>
    76         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
    77         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
    78         -</TR>
    79         -<TR>
    80         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
    81         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linesfill">-linesfill</A></TD>
    82         -</TR>
    83         -<TR>
    84         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linestipple">-linestipple</A></TD>
    85         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-opencmd">-opencmd</A></TD>
    86         -</TR>
    87         -<TR>
    88         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
    89         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
    90         -</TR>
    91         -<TR>
    92         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectcommand">-selectcommand</A></TD>
    93         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
    94         -</TR>
    95         -<TR>
    96         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showlines">-showlines</A></TD>
    97         -<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
    98         -</TR>
    99         -</TABLE></DD>
   100         -</DL>
   101         -
   102         -<DL>
   103         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
   104         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindArea"><B>bindArea</B></A>
   105         - <I>event</I>
   106         - <I>script</I>
   107         -</DD>
   108         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
   109         - <I>event</I>
   110         - <I>script</I>
   111         -</DD>
   112         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
   113         - <I>event</I>
   114         - <I>script</I>
   115         -</DD>
   116         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
   117         - <I>option</I>
   118         -</DD>
   119         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#closetree"><B>closetree</B></A>
   120         - <I>node</I>
   121         -</DD>
   122         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
   123         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   124         -</DD>
   125         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
   126         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   127         -</DD>
   128         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
   129         - <I>node</I>
   130         - <I>text</I>
   131         - ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
   132         - ?<I>clickres</I>?
   133         - ?<I>select</I>?
   134         -</DD>
   135         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
   136         - <I>node</I>
   137         -</DD>
   138         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#find"><B>find</B></A>
   139         - <I>findinfo</I>
   140         - ?<I>confine</I>?
   141         -</DD>
   142         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
   143         - <I>node</I>
   144         -</DD>
   145         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
   146         - <I>index</I>
   147         - <I>parent</I>
   148         - <I>node</I>
   149         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   150         -</DD>
   151         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
   152         - <I>node</I>
   153         - <I>option</I>
   154         -</DD>
   155         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   156         - <I>node</I>
   157         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   158         -</DD>
   159         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#line"><B>line</B></A>
   160         - <I>node</I>
   161         -</DD>
   162         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
   163         - <I>parent</I>
   164         - <I>node</I>
   165         - <I>index</I>
   166         -</DD>
   167         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#nodes"><B>nodes</B></A>
   168         - <I>node</I>
   169         - ?<I>first</I>?
   170         - ?<I>last</I>?
   171         -</DD>
   172         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#opentree"><B>opentree</B></A>
   173         - <I>node</I>
   174         -</DD>
   175         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#parent"><B>parent</B></A>
   176         - <I>node</I>
   177         -</DD>
   178         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
   179         - <I>node</I>
   180         - <I>neworder</I>
   181         -</DD>
   182         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
   183         - <I>node</I>
   184         -</DD>
   185         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
   186         - <I>cmd</I>
   187         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   188         -</DD>
   189         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#toggle"><B>toggle</B></A>
   190         - <I>node</I>
   191         -</DD>
   192         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#visible"><B>visible</B></A>
   193         - <I>node</I>
   194         -</DD>
   195         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
   196         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   197         -</DD>
   198         -<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
   199         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   200         -</DD>
   201         -</DL>
   202         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   203         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   204         -<P>
   205         -
   206         -<B>Tree</B> widget uses canvas to display a hierarchical list of items (called nodes).
   207         -Each node is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
   208         -image or window. Each node can have a list of subnodes, which can be collapsed or expanded.
   209         -Each node is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
   210         -<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
   211         -A node is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
   212         -<B>insert</B> command). The node named <I>root</I> is the root of
   213         -the tree and is not drawn.
   214         -The tree structure is directly maintained by the widget.
   215         -
   216         -</P>
   217         -<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   218         -<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
   219         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-closecmd"><B>-closecmd</B></A></DT>
   220         -<DD>
   221         -
   222         -Specifies a command to be called when user close a node. The
   223         -closed node is appended to the command.
   224         -
   225         -</DD>
   226         -</DL>
   227         -
   228         -<DL>
   229         -    <DT><A NAME="-crossfill"><B>-crossfill</B></A></DT>
   230         -    <DD>
   231         -    Specifies a foreground color for the cross bitmap.
   232         -    </DD>
   233         -</DL>
   234         -
   235         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossclosebitmap"><B>-crossclosebitmap</B></A></DT>
   236         -<DD>
   237         -    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
   238         -    when a node is closed.
   239         -</DD>
   240         -</DL>
   241         -
   242         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-crosscloseimage"><B>-crosscloseimage</B></A></DT>
   243         -<DD>
   244         -    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
   245         -    when a node is closed.  Overrides the -crossclosebitmap option.
   246         -</DD>
   247         -</DL>
   248         -
   249         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenbitmap"><B>-crossopenbitmap</B></A></DT>
   250         -<DD>
   251         -    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
   252         -    when a node is open.
   253         -</DD>
   254         -</DL>
   255         -
   256         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenimage"><B>-crossopenimage</B></A></DT>
   257         -<DD>
   258         -    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
   259         -    when a node is open.  Overrides the -crossopenbitmap option.
   260         -</DD>
   261         -</DL>
   262         -
   263         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
   264         -<DD>
   265         -
   266         -Specifies horizontal indentation between a node and its children.
   267         -
   268         -</DD>
   269         -</DL>
   270         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
   271         -<DD>
   272         -
   273         -Specifies vertical size of the nodes.
   274         -
   275         -</DD>
   276         -</DL>
   277         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
   278         -<DD>
   279         -A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
   280         -</DD>
   281         -</DL>
   282         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
   283         -<DD>
   284         -
   285         -Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
   286         -<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
   287         -option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   288         -
   289         -</DD>
   290         -</DL>
   291         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
   292         -<DD>
   293         -
   294         -Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
   295         -Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.
   296         -
   297         -</DD>
   298         -</DL>
   299         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
   300         -<DD>
   301         -
   302         -Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
   303         -if no node is designated. In other cases:
   304         -<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
   305         -<UL>
   306         -<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TREE_NODE</I> if empty as the data type, 
   307         -<LI><I>{copy move link}</I> as the operations, 
   308         -<LI>the node identifier as the data.
   309         -</UL>
   310         -If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   311         -<UL>
   312         -<LI>the pathname of the tree,
   313         -<LI>the identifier of the dragged node,
   314         -<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
   315         -</UL>
   316         -and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
   317         -<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   318         -
   319         -</DD>
   320         -</DL>
   321         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
   322         -<DD>
   323         -
   324         -Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.
   325         -
   326         -</DD>
   327         -</DL>
   328         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
   329         -<DD>
   330         -
   331         -Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
   332         -and extract node and position.
   333         -<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
   334         -<UL>
   335         -<LI>the pathname of the tree,
   336         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   337         -<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
   338         -<UL>
   339         -<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
   340         -<LI><I>{</I><B>node</B> <I>node}</I> or
   341         -<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>node index}</I>.
   342         -</UL>
   343         -<LI>the current operation,
   344         -<LI>the data type,
   345         -<LI>the data.
   346         -</UL>
   347         -
   348         -
   349         -</DD>
   350         -</DL>
   351         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
   352         -<DD>
   353         -A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
   354         -</DD>
   355         -</DL>
   356         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
   357         -<DD>
   358         -
   359         -Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
   360         -and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
   361         -If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
   362         -<UL>
   363         -<LI>the pathname of the tree,
   364         -<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
   365         -<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
   366         -<UL>
   367         -<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
   368         -<LI>the targeted node if drag icon points a node and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>n</I>, else empty string.
   369         -<LI>a list containing a node and the position within the children of the node where drag 
   370         -icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
   371         -<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside a node and between two
   372         -nodes. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>node</I>.
   373         -</UL>
   374         -<LI>the current operation,
   375         -<LI>the data type,
   376         -<LI>the data.
   377         -</UL>
   378         -The command must return a list with two elements:
   379         -<UL>
   380         -<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
   381         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
   382         -<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>node</I> or <I>position</I>.
   383         -</UL>
   384         -
   385         -</DD>
   386         -</DL>
   387         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
   388         -<DD>
   389         -
   390         -Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
   391         -<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
   392         -<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two nodes,
   393         -and <B>n</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside nodes.
   394         -
   395         -</DD>
   396         -</DL>
   397         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
   398         -<DD>
   399         -
   400         -Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
   401         -See option <B>droptypes</B> of
   402         -<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
   403         -for more infromation.
   404         -
   405         -<BR>Default is <I>TREE_NODE</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.
   406         -
   407         -</DD>
   408         -</DL>
   409         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
   410         -<DD>
   411         -
   412         -Specifies the desired height for the tree in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.
   413         -
   414         -</DD>
   415         -</DL>
   416         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-linesfill"><B>-linesfill</B></A></DT>
   417         -<DD>
   418         -
   419         -Specifies a foreground color for the lines between nodes.
   420         -
   421         -</DD>
   422         -</DL>
   423         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-linestipple"><B>-linestipple</B></A></DT>
   424         -<DD>
   425         -
   426         -Specifies a stipple bitmap for the lines between nodes.
   427         -
   428         -</DD>
   429         -</DL>
   430         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-opencmd"><B>-opencmd</B></A></DT>
   431         -<DD>
   432         -
   433         -Specifies a command to be called when the user opens a node. The name
   434         -of the opened node is appended to the command.
   435         -
   436         -</DD>
   437         -</DL>
   438         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
   439         -<DD>
   440         -
   441         -Specifies distance between image or window and text of the nodes.
   442         -
   443         -</DD>
   444         -</DL>
   445         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
   446         -<DD>
   447         -
   448         -Specifies wether or not the tree should be redrawn when entering idle.
   449         -Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the tree.
   450         -
   451         -</DD>
   452         -</DL>
   453         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectcommand"><B>-selectcommand</B></A></DT>
   454         -<DD>
   455         -
   456         -Specifies a command to be called when the selection is changed. The
   457         -path of the tree widget and the selected nodes are appended to the
   458         -command.
   459         -
   460         -</DD>
   461         -</DL>
   462         -
   463         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill</B></A></DT>
   464         -<DD>
   465         -    If true, the selection box will be drawn across the entire tree from
   466         -    left-to-right instead of just around the item text.
   467         -</DD>
   468         -</DL>
   469         -
   470         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-showlines"><B>-showlines</B></A></DT>
   471         -<DD>
   472         -
   473         -Specifies whether or not lines should be drawn between nodes.
   474         -
   475         -</DD>
   476         -</DL>
   477         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
   478         -<DD>
   479         -
   480         -Specifies the desired width for the tree in units of 8 pixels.
   481         -
   482         -</DD>
   483         -</DL>
   484         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   485         -
   486         -<B><A NAME="nodes">NODE NAMES</A></B><BR>
   487         -<p>
   488         -Certain special characters in node names are automatically substituted
   489         -by the tree during operation.  These characters are <b>&amp; | ^ !</b>.
   490         -They are all substituted with a <b>_</b> character.  This is only to
   491         -avoid errors because the characters are special to the tree widget.
   492         -</p>
   493         -
   494         -<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   495         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindArea"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindArea</B></A>
   496         - <I>event</I>
   497         - <I>script</I>
   498         -</DT><DD>
   499         -
   500         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   501         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs anywhere within the Tree area.
   502         -</DD></DL>
   503         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
   504         - <I>event</I>
   505         - <I>script</I>
   506         -</DT><DD>
   507         -
   508         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   509         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a node.
   510         -The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
   511         -
   512         -<P>
   513         -If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindText</B> is overwritten.
   514         -</P>
   515         -</DD></DL>
   516         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
   517         - <I>event</I>
   518         - <I>script</I>
   519         -</DT><DD>
   520         -
   521         -This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
   522         -sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a node.
   523         -The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).
   524         -
   525         -<P>
   526         -If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindImage</B> is overwritten.
   527         -</P>
   528         -</DD></DL>
   529         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
   530         - <I>option</I>
   531         -</DT><DD>
   532         -
   533         -Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
   534         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   535         -</DD></DL>
   536         -<DL><DT><A NAME="closetree"><I>pathName</I> <B>closetree</B></A> <I>node</I>
   537         -?<I>recurse</I>?
   538         -</DT><DD>
   539         -
   540         -This command close all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse
   541         -through the tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 0
   542         -depending on <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
   543         -
   544         -</DD></DL>
   545         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
   546         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   547         -</DT><DD>
   548         -
   549         -Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is
   550         -specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
   551         -<I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the
   552         -command returns a list describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will
   553         -be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
   554         -<I>option</I> is specified). If one or more <I>option-value</I> pairs are
   555         -specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the
   556         -given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
   557         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
   558         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   559         -
   560         -</DD></DL>
   561         -<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
   562         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   563         -</DT><DD>
   564         -
   565         -Deletes all nodes (and children of them) in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
   566         -of nodes or a list of list of nodes.
   567         -To delete all the tree, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName nodes root]</I>.
   568         -
   569         -</DD></DL>
   570         -<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
   571         - <I>node</I>
   572         - <I>text</I>
   573         - ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
   574         - ?<I>clickres</I>?
   575         - ?<I>select</I>?
   576         -</DT><DD>
   577         -
   578         -Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of a node. This is
   579         -possible only if <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
   580         -<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
   581         -edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
   582         -if edition is accepted.
   583         -<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
   584         -<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
   585         -If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
   586         -If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
   587         -In all other case, the edition continues.
   588         -<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
   589         -the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
   590         -and continue edition.
   591         -<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.
   592         -
   593         -</DD></DL>
   594         -<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
   595         - <I>node</I>
   596         -</DT><DD>
   597         -
   598         -Returns whether or not <I>node</I> exists in the tree.
   599         -
   600         -</DD></DL>
   601         -<DL><DT><A NAME="find"><I>pathName</I> <B>find</B></A>
   602         - <I>findinfo</I>
   603         - ?<I>confine</I>?
   604         -</DT><DD>
   605         -
   606         -<p>
   607         -Returns the node given by the position <I>findinfo</I>.
   608         -<I>findinfo</I> can take the form of a pixel position <I>@x,y</I> or
   609         -of the line number of a currently visible Tree node.  The first line
   610         -of the Tree has the value of zero.
   611         -</p>
   612         -
   613         -<p>
   614         -If <I>confine</I> is non-empty, then confine <I>findinfo</I> to only
   615         -match pixel positions for the area consumed by Tree labels, not just
   616         -anywhere on their lines.  (<I>confine</I> has no effect if
   617         -<I>findinfo</I> is a line number.)
   618         -</p>
   619         -
   620         -</DD></DL>
   621         -<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
   622         - <I>node</I>
   623         -</DT><DD>
   624         -
   625         -Returns the position of <I>node</I> in its parent.
   626         -
   627         -</DD></DL>
   628         -<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
   629         - <I>index</I>
   630         - <I>parent</I>
   631         - <I>node</I>
   632         - ?<I>option value...</I>?
   633         -</DT><DD>
   634         -
   635         -<p>
   636         -Inserts a new node identified by <I>node</I> in the children list of
   637         -<I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
   638         -</p>
   639         -
   640         -<p>
   641         -Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the node name will be replaced by the
   642         -number of the item in the order of insertion.  The non-printable characters
   643         -\1 to \5 are reserved for internal use and should not be present in node
   644         -names.
   645         -</p>
   646         -
   647         -
   648         -<P>
   649         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-anchor"><B>-anchor</B></A></DT>
   650         -<DD>
   651         -    Specifies the anchor of the image or window of the node.  Defaults to w.
   652         -</DD>
   653         -</DL>
   654         -
   655         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
   656         -<DD>
   657         -
   658         -User data associated to the node.
   659         -
   660         -</DD>
   661         -</DL>
   662         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
   663         -<DD>
   664         -
   665         -Specifies the horizontal indentation of the node.  If the value is -1, the
   666         -node will be drawn with the deltax for the entire tree.
   667         -
   668         -</DD>
   669         -</DL>
   670         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-drawcross"><B>-drawcross</B></A></DT>
   671         -<DD>
   672         -
   673         -Specifies how the cross used to expand or collapse the children of a node
   674         -should be drawn. 
   675         -Must be one of <B>auto</B>, <B>always</B> or <B>never</B>.
   676         -<BR>If <B>auto</B>, the cross is drawn only if the node has children.
   677         -If <B>always</B>, the cross is always drawn.
   678         -If <B>never</B>, the cross is never drawn.
   679         -To maintain compatibility with older versions of this widget,
   680         -<B>allways</B> is a deprecated synonym to <B>always</B>.
   681         -
   682         -</DD>
   683         -</DL>
   684         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
   685         -<DD>
   686         -
   687         -Specifies the foreground color of the label of the node.
   688         -
   689         -</DD>
   690         -</DL>
   691         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
   692         -<DD>
   693         -
   694         -Specifies a font for the label of the node.
   695         -
   696         -</DD>
   697         -</DL>
   698         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT>
   699         -<DD>
   700         -
   701         -If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help text to display.
   702         -The command must return a string to display.
   703         -If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed. 
   704         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   705         -</DD>
   706         -</DL>
   707         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
   708         -<DD>
   709         -
   710         -Text for dynamic help.
   711         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   712         -</DD>
   713         -</DL>
   714         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
   715         -<DD>
   716         -Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
   717         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   718         -</DD>
   719         -</DL>
   720         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
   721         -<DD>
   722         -Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
   723         -See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
   724         -</DD>
   725         -</DL>
   726         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
   727         -<DD>
   728         -
   729         -Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the node.
   730         -<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
   731         -</DD>
   732         -</DL>
   733         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-open"><B>-open</B></A></DT>
   734         -<DD>
   735         -
   736         -Specifies wether or not the children of the node should be drawn.
   737         -
   738         -</DD>
   739         -</DL>
   740         -<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
   741         -<DD>
   742         -
   743         -Specifies the distance between image or window and the text of the node.  If
   744         -the value is -1, the node will be drawn with the padx for the entire tree.
   745         -
   746         -</DD>
   747         -</DL>
   748         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-selectable"><B>-selectable</B></A></DT>
   749         -<DD>
   750         -
   751         -Specifies if the node can be selected or not.
   752         -
   753         -</DD>
   754         -</DL>
   755         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
   756         -<DD>
   757         -
   758         -Specifies the label of the node.
   759         -
   760         -</DD>
   761         -</DL>
   762         -<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
   763         -<DD>
   764         -
   765         -Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the node.
   766         -<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
   767         -</DD>
   768         -</DL>
   769         -</DD></DL>
   770         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
   771         - <I>node</I>
   772         - <I>option</I>
   773         -</DT><DD>
   774         -
   775         -Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
   776         -<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.
   777         -
   778         -</DD></DL>
   779         -<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
   780         - <I>node</I>
   781         - ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
   782         -</DT><DD>
   783         -
   784         -This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
   785         -options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
   786         -the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
   787         -item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
   788         -in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
   789         -returns a list describing the current options for the item.
   790         -Read-only options are not be modified.
   791         -
   792         -</DD></DL>
   793         -<DL><DT><A NAME="line"><I>pathName</I> <B>line</B></A>
   794         - <I>node</I>
   795         -</DT><DD>
   796         -
   797         -<p>
   798         -Returns the line number where <I>node</I> was drawn.  If the node is
   799         -not visible then return -1.  The first line of the tree has the value
   800         -of 0.
   801         -</p>
   802         -
   803         -</DD></DL>
   804         -<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
   805         - <I>parent</I>
   806         - <I>node</I>
   807         - <I>index</I>
   808         -</DT><DD>
   809         -
   810         -Moves <I>node</I> to the children list of <I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
   811         -<I>parent</I> can not be a descendant of <I>node</I>.
   812         -
   813         -</DD></DL>
   814         -<DL><DT><A NAME="nodes"><I>pathName</I> <B>nodes</B></A>
   815         - <I>node</I>
   816         - ?<I>first</I>?
   817         - ?<I>last</I>?
   818         -</DT><DD>
   819         -
   820         -Returns parts of the children of <I>node</I>, following <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>.<BR>
   821         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all children.
   822         -If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the child at index
   823         -<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
   824         -If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
   825         -are all of the children between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
   826         -inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
   827         -forms for indices.
   828         -
   829         -</DD></DL>
   830         -<DL><DT><A NAME="opentree"><I>pathName</I> <B>opentree</B></A> <I>node</I> ?<I>recurse</I>?
   831         -
   832         -</DT><DD>
   833         -
   834         -This command open all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse through the
   835         -tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 1 depending on value
   836         -of <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.
   837         -
   838         -</DD></DL>
   839         -<DL><DT><A NAME="parent"><I>pathName</I> <B>parent</B></A>
   840         - <I>node</I>
   841         -</DT><DD>
   842         -
   843         -Returns the parent of <I>node</I>.
   844         -
   845         -</DD></DL>
   846         -<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
   847         - <I>node</I>
   848         - <I>neworder</I>
   849         -</DT><DD>
   850         -
   851         -Modifies the order of children of <I>node</I> given by <I>neworder</I>. Children of
   852         -<I>node</I> that do not appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.
   853         -
   854         -</DD></DL>
   855         -<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
   856         - <I>node</I>
   857         -</DT><DD>
   858         -
   859         -Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>node</I> visible.
   860         -
   861         -</DD></DL>
   862         -<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
   863         - <I>cmd</I>
   864         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   865         -</DT><DD>
   866         -
   867         -Modifies the list of selected nodes following <I>cmd</I>:
   868         -<DL>
   869         -<DT><B>add</B>
   870         -<DD>Adds all nodes in <I>arg</I> to the selection.
   871         -<DT><B>clear</B>
   872         -<DD>Removes all nodes from the selection.
   873         -<DT><B>get</B>
   874         -<DD>Returns a list containing the indices of current selected nodes.
   875         -<DT><B>includes</B>
   876         -<DD>Tests if the specified node is selected. Returns true if the answer is yes, and false else.
   877         -<DT><B>range</B>
   878         -<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes between the two specified ones.
   879         -<DT><B>remove</B>
   880         -<DD>Removes all nodes in <I>arg</I> from the selection.
   881         -<DT><B>set</B>
   882         -<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
   883         -<DT><B>toggle</B>
   884         -<DD>Toggles the selection status of all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
   885         -</DL>
   886         -
   887         -The subcommands <B>add</B>, <B>range</B>, and <B>set</B> silently
   888         -ignore nodes which are declared unselectable. See the node option
   889         -<a href="#Node-selectable">-selectable</a> to influence this.
   890         -
   891         -</DD></DL>
   892         -
   893         -</DD></DL>
   894         -
   895         -<DL><DT><A NAME="toggle"><I>pathName</I> <B>toggle</B></A>
   896         - <I>node</I>
   897         -</DT><DD>
   898         -    Toggle the open/close status of the given <i>node</i>.
   899         -</DD></DL>
   900         -
   901         -<DL><DT><A NAME="visible"><I>pathName</I> <B>visible</B></A>
   902         - <I>node</I>
   903         -</DT><DD>
   904         -
   905         -Returns whether or not <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
   906         -
   907         -</DD></DL>
   908         -<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
   909         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   910         -</DT><DD>
   911         -
   912         -Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   913         -
   914         -</DD></DL>
   915         -<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
   916         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   917         -</DT><DD>
   918         -
   919         -Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.
   920         -
   921         -</DD></DL>
   922         -
   923         -<B><A NAME="nodes">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
   924         -
   925         -<p>
   926         -A <b>&lt;&lt;TreeSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
   927         -selection in the tree changes.  This is the default behavior of an
   928         -item in the tree, but it can be overridden with the bindText or
   929         -bindImage command.  If the button 1 binding is overridden, this event may
   930         -not be generated.
   931         -</p>
   932         -
   933         -<p>
   934         -The tree has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
   935         -</p>
   936         -
   937         -</BODY></HTML>

Deleted bwidget-1.9.8/BWman/Widget.html.

     1         -<HTML>
     2         -<HEAD><TITLE>Widget</TITLE></HEAD>
     3         -<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
     4         -<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
     5         -<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
     6         -<DD><B>Widget</B>
     7         - - The Widget base class
     8         -</DD></DL>
     9         -<DL>
    10         -<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
    11         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#addmap"><B>addmap</B></A>
    12         - <I>class</I>
    13         - <I>subclass</I>
    14         - <I>subpath</I>
    15         - <I>options</I>
    16         -</DD>
    17         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#bwinclude"><B>bwinclude</B></A>
    18         - <I>class</I>
    19         - <I>subclass</I>
    20         - <I>subpath</I>
    21         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
    22         -</DD>
    23         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
    24         - <I>path</I>
    25         - <I>option</I>
    26         -</DD>
    27         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
    28         - <I>path</I>
    29         - <I>options</I>
    30         -</DD>
    31         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#create"><B>create</B></A>
    32         - <I>class</I>
    33         - <I>path</I>
    34         - ?<I>rename</I>?
    35         -</DD>
    36         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#declare"><B>declare</B></A>
    37         - <I>class</I>
    38         - <I>optlist</I>
    39         -</DD>
    40         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#define"><B>define</B></A>
    41         - <I>class</I>
    42         - <I>filename</I>
    43         - ?<I>class ...</I>?
    44         -</DD>
    45         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#destroy"><B>destroy</B></A>
    46         - <I>path</I>
    47         -</DD>
    48         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusNext"><B>focusNext</B></A>
    49         - <I>w</I>
    50         -</DD>
    51         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusOK"><B>focusOK</B></A>
    52         - <I>w</I>
    53         -</DD>
    54         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#focusPrev"><B>focusPrev</B></A>
    55         - <I>w</I>
    56         -</DD>
    57         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-doc"><B>generate-doc</B></A>
    58         - <I>dir</I>
    59         - <I>widgetlist</I>
    60         -</DD>
    61         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#generate-widget-doc"><B>generate-widget-doc</B></A>
    62         - <I>class</I>
    63         - <I>iscmd</I>
    64         - <I>file</I>
    65         -</DD>
    66         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getoption"><B>getoption</B></A>
    67         - <I>path</I>
    68         - <I>option</I>
    69         -</DD>
    70         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#getVariable"><B>getVariable</B></A>
    71         - <I>path</I>
    72         - <I>varName</I>
    73         - <I>?myVarName?</I>
    74         -</DD>
    75         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#hasChanged"><B>hasChanged</B></A>
    76         - <I>path</I>
    77         - <I>option</I>
    78         - <I>pvalue</I>
    79         -</DD>
    80         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#init"><B>init</B></A>
    81         - <I>class</I>
    82         - <I>path</I>
    83         - <I>options</I>
    84         -</DD>
    85         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#setoption"><B>setoption</B></A>
    86         - <I>path</I>
    87         - <I>option</I>
    88         - <I>value</I>
    89         -</DD>
    90         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#subcget"><B>subcget</B></A>
    91         - <I>path</I>
    92         - <I>subwidget</I>
    93         -</DD>
    94         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#syncoptions"><B>syncoptions</B></A>
    95         - <I>class</I>
    96         - <I>subclass</I>
    97         - <I>subpath</I>
    98         - <I>options</I>
    99         -</DD>
   100         -<DD>Widget::<A HREF="#tkinclude"><B>tkinclude</B></A>
   101         - <I>class</I>
   102         - <I>tkwidget</I>
   103         - <I>subpath</I>
   104         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   105         -</DD>
   106         -</DL>
   107         -<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
   108         -<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
   109         -<P>
   110         -
   111         -The <B>Widget</B> namespace handle data associated to all BWidget and provide commands
   112         -to easily define BWidget.
   113         -<BR>For commands can be used to define a BWidget:
   114         -<B>tkinclude</B>, <B>bwinclude</B>, <B>declare</B>, <B>addmap</B> and <B>syncoptions</B>.
   115         -Here is the definition of <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A> widget:
   116         -<BR><BR>
   117         -<CENTER>
   118         -<TABLE BORDER=2 CELSPACING=2 WIDTH=80%>
   119         -<TR><TD><PRE>
   120         -namespace eval ComboBox {
   121         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># We're using ArrowButton, Entry and LabelFrame</I></FONT>
   122         -    ArrowButton::use
   123         -    Entry::use
   124         -    LabelFrame::use
   125         -
   126         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># Include resources of LabelFrame</I></FONT>
   127         -    Widget::bwinclude ComboBox LabelFrame .labf \ 
   128         -        rename     {-text -label} \ 
   129         -        remove     {-focus} \ 
   130         -        prefix     {label -justify -width -anchor -height -font} \ 
   131         -        initialize {-relief sunken -borderwidth 2}
   132         -
   133         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># Include resources of Entry</I></FONT>
   134         -    Widget::bwinclude ComboBox Entry .e \ 
   135         -        remove {-relief -bd -borderwidth -bg -fg} \ 
   136         -        rename {-foreground -entryfg -background -entrybg}
   137         -
   138         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># Declare new resources</I></FONT>
   139         -    Widget::declare ComboBox {
   140         -        {-height      TkResource 0  0 listbox}
   141         -        {-values      String     "" 0}
   142         -        {-modifycmd   String     "" 0}
   143         -        {-postcommand String     "" 0}
   144         -    }
   145         -
   146         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># Map resources to subwidget</I></FONT>
   147         -    Widget::addmap ComboBox "" :cmd {-background {}}
   148         -    Widget::addmap ComboBox ArrowButton .a \ 
   149         -        {-foreground {} -background {} -disabledforeground {} -state {}}
   150         -
   151         -    <FONT COLOR=red><I># Synchronize subwidget options</I></FONT>
   152         -    Widget::syncoptions ComboBox Entry .e {-text {}}
   153         -    Widget::syncoptions ComboBox LabelFrame .labf {-label -text -underline {}}
   154         -
   155         -    proc use {} {}
   156         -}</PRE>
   157         -</TD></TR>
   158         -</TABLE></CENTER>
   159         -
   160         -</P>
   161         -<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
   162         -<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
   163         -<DL><DT><A NAME="addmap">Widget::<B>addmap</B></A>
   164         - <I>class</I>
   165         - <I>subclass</I>
   166         - <I>subpath</I>
   167         - <I>options</I>
   168         -</DT><DD>
   169         -
   170         -This command map some resources to subwidget.
   171         -Mapped resources automatically configure subwidget when widget is configured.
   172         -<UL>
   173         -<LI><I>class</I> is the class of the new BWidget
   174         -<LI><I>subclass</I> is the class the subwidget (BWidget class, e.g Entry, or empty for Tk widget)
   175         -<LI><I>subpath</I> is the path of the subwidget
   176         -<LI><I>options</I> is the list <I>{option realres ...}</I> of options to map to subwidget
   177         -</UL>
   178         -</DD></DL>
   179         -<DL><DT><A NAME="bwinclude">Widget::<B>bwinclude</B></A>
   180         - <I>class</I>
   181         - <I>subclass</I>
   182         - <I>subpath</I>
   183         - ?<I>arg...</I>?
   184         -</DT><DD>
   185         -
   186         -This command includes into a new BWidget the resources of another BWidget.
   187         -Arguments are:
   188         -<UL>
   189         -<LI><I>class</I> class of the new widget
   190         -<LI><I>subclass</I> class name of the BWidget to be included
   191         -<LI><I>subpath</I>  path of the widget to configure when BWidget is configured
   192         -<LI><I>options</I> is:
   193         -<UL>
   194         -<LI><I><B>include</B> {option option ...}</I>
   195         -<BR>list of options to include (all if not defined)
   196         -<LI><I><B>remove</B> {option option ...}</I>
   197         -<BR> list of options to remove
   198         -<LI><I><B>rename</B> {option name option name ...}</I>
   199         -<BR>list of options to rename
   200         -<LI><I><B>prefix</B> {prefix option option ...}</I>
   201         -<BR>pefix all <I>option</I> by <I>prefix</I>
   202         -<LI><I><B>initialize</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
   203         -<BR>default value of options
   204         -<LI><I><B>readonly</B> {option value option value ...}</I>
   205         -<BR>new readonly flag
   206         -</UL></UL>
   207         -</DD></DL>
   208         -<DL><DT><A NAME="cget">Widget::<B>cget</B></A>
   209         - <I>path</I>
   210         - <I>option</I>
   211         -</DT><DD>
   212         -
   213         -Returns the value of <I>option</I> of BWidget <I>path</I>. <B>cget</B> tests the option
   214         -existence and takes care of synchronization with subwidget.
   215         -Typically called by the BWidget <B>cget</B> command.
   216         -
   217         -</DD></DL>
   218         -<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">Widget::<B>configure</B></A>
   219         - <I>path</I>
   220         - <I>options</I>
   221         -</DT><DD>
   222         -Description text
   223         -</DD></DL>
   224         -
   225         -<DL><DT><A NAME="create">Widget::<B>create</B></A>
   226         - <I>class</I>
   227         - <I>path</I>
   228         - ?<I>rename</I>?
   229         -</DT><DD>
   230         -    The standard method for creating a BWidget.  The real widget path
   231         -    is renamed to $path:cmd, and a new proc is created to replace the
   232         -    path which points to the BWidget's commands.
   233         -
   234         -    <p>
   235         -    If <i>rename</i> is false, the path will not be renamed, but the
   236         -    proc will still be created.  This is useful when inheriting another
   237         -    BWidget who will already have renamed the widget.
   238         -    </p>
   239         -
   240         -    <p>
   241         -    The command returns the widget path.  This command is usually the
   242         -    last command executed in the ::create command for the widget.
   243         -    </p>
   244         -</DD></DL>
   245         -
   246         -<DL><DT><A NAME="declare">Widget::<B>declare</B></A>
   247         - <I>class</I>
   248         - <I>optlist</I>
   249         -</DT><DD>
   250         -
   251         -This command declare new resources for a BWidget.
   252         -<UL>
   253         -<LI><I>class</I> is class of the new widget
   254         -<LI><I>options</I> is the list describing new options. Each new option is a list
   255         -<B>{option type value ro ?args?}</B> where:
   256         -<UL>
   257         -<LI><I>option</I> is the name of the option
   258         -<LI><I>type</I> is the type of the option
   259         -<LI><I>value</I> is the default value of the option
   260         -<LI><I>ro</I> is the readonly flag of the option
   261         -<LI><I>args</I> depends on type
   262         -</UL></UL>
   263         -<BR>
   264         -<I>type</I> can be:
   265         -<BR>
   266         -<DL>
   267         -<DT><B>TkResource</B></DT>
   268         -<DD>
   269         -<I>value</I> of <I>option</I> denotes a resource of a Tk widget. <I>args</I> must be <I>class</I> or
   270         -<I>{class realoption}</I>. <I>class</I> is the creation command of the Tk widget, e.g.
   271         -<B>entry</B>.